JP7399747B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

A pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, includes a storage part that can store game media supplied from a game island installed in a game parlor, a payout device (payout part) that can pay out the game media, A guide passage forming part that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage part to the payout part, and the storage part and the guide passage forming part are attached to the game frame with screw members. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw members for attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section to the game frame, the screw members attached inside the game island, etc. come off, and the storage section and the guide passage forming section are formed. If the screw member falls into the dispensing device along with the game media, the game media may not be able to be dispensed properly, the dispensing device may malfunction, or the screw member together with the game media may fall into the dispensing device. There was a problem in that the funds were sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from getting mixed into the payout section.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can play games,
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw fall restriction portion provided above the guide passage forming portion;
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
There is an uncovered area not covered by the screw fall restriction part on the upper surface of the guide passage forming part,
The guide passage forming part is provided with a plurality of specific restriction parts for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming part to the dispensing part,
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction portions are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered areas in the guide path forming portion,
The screw fall restriction part is
The game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion does not stay there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion can stay on the screw fall restriction portion without falling into the guide path forming portion. configured,
including a first retention part and a second retention part capable of retaining the screw member on the screw fall restriction part,
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
a cover part (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The cover part is provided with a predetermined restriction part (for example, the elongated hole 316A) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. ~316C, concave grooves 326A~326C, and concave portions 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guide passage forming part for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part (FIG. 11). , see Figures 12 and 27),
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, it has been possible to perform performances using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, There were some that made it possible to perform a performance similar to that of moving a movable body. However, in such gaming machines, there is a problem in that the pseudo-movable objects are simply moved and displayed in the same way as the movable objects, and it is not possible to increase the interest of the performance. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the display.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as seen diagonally from behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage formation body to the gaming machine frame. It is an enlarged back view showing the back upper part of the gaming machine frame. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10(A). (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along JJ line in (A), and (D) is a plan view showing the third cover body. (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the first state; (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is attached, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in (B). It is a perspective view showing the state around the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). It is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back side of the game frame is viewed diagonally from behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guidance path formation part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. FIG. (A) shows the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) shows the state when the ball stopper is in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along the line UU in (C), showing the retention state of the screw member. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guidance path formation part which shows the moving state of the game ball on a cover part. (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine in the feature section 053SG. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the state where the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from a data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low voltage components and high voltage components mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a circuit diagram concerning connection of a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit in a game control board in Example 2. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, and (B) is a perspective view from below the specific electronic component. FIG. It is a sectional view showing a state where specific electronic parts are soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. It is a diagram showing execution periods of various performances in normal reach and super reach. It is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various performances in Super Reach. It is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation degree according to the execution status of the advanced presentation A and the advanced presentation B. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a movable range of a mounted movable body, (B) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a second pseudo movable body display. (A) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows preview performance type determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance A type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance A type. (A) is a flowchart showing the advanced suggestion performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the advanced suggestion performance type. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance B type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance B type. (A) is a flowchart showing a fixed performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a fixed performance type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations mainly in normal reach of super reach β. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (F) are also diagrams showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of production operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of movement display of the first pseudo movable object display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a light emitting display section and a mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having the following.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
A cover part provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover part of the third cover body 330) 334),
The cover part restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling to the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portion 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2,
The predetermined restriction portions (for example, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed portion 336) are provided so that the game media that has fallen onto the cover portion can fall from above the cover portion without being retained. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restriction part, and a state in which the screw member can be retained at all times can be maintained, so that the screw member that falls onto the cover part falls into the guide passage forming part. This can be prevented.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine described in Form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restriction section includes a first retention section (for example, the elongated hole 316A) that can retain the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover section. - 316C) and a second retention part (for example, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) is provided with the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device) of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen into the guide passage forming part. A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting movement to 200) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine described in Form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming part to fall out of the guiding passage forming part before reaching the dispensing part. (L11>L2, see Figure 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member gets mixed into the guide passage forming part, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guiding passage forming part, so that the screw member mixed inside the guiding passage forming part does not get mixed into the dispensing part. can be prevented. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being obstructed by the screw member mixed into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at the position closest to the dispensing section (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimensions of the other holes 271A to 271G). (See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part. .

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or 7,
The cover parts (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330) There is an uncovered area (for example, an uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover part 334),
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered areas in the guide passage forming part (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage forming part from the non-covered area, it can be dropped out of the guiding passage forming part through the hole.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage section is
disposed on the upper surface side of a predetermined part (for example, the first protrusion 224) of the game frame,
The screw member is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so as not to enter between the screw member and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
a first board (for example, the main board 11, the effect control board 12, etc.) attached at a position below the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202);
a second board (for example, a terminal board 210) attached at a position above the guide path forming part;
Equipped with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A, etc. are mounted by a mounting method using screw members). While the terminal board 210 is attached to the game board 2 by using a screw member, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from a screw member. (See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected;
The first board has a smaller number of connected wires than the external output board (for example, the number of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 The number of cables C that can be connected to is the first number (for example, 20), while the number of cables C that can be connected to the Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second board, which has a large number of connected wires and is likely to be subject to external force during wiring connection work, cannot be attached with screw members, the screw members may come off due to external force being applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming section.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to Form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided;
a mounting frame (for example, board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized in that it has a mounting frame restriction portion (for example, the recess 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame toward the guide path forming portion.
According to this feature, by using the mounting frame of the external output board, it is possible to prevent a screw member that has fallen into the guide path forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming part are placed around the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Special restriction parts (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict falling into the forming part (Fig. 22(C), Fig. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The special restriction part prevents the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage formation part (for example, the first guide passage formation part 202) to the guidance passage formation part. A special retention part (for example, recessed parts 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching the attached part, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached part,
The screw member that has come off from the attached part but does not stay in the special retention part can move toward the cover part (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A)(B), and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can accommodate at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), 24(B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The cover part is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the dispensing part side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper member 340) that can retain a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the dispensing portion side in the inclination direction of the cover portion (see FIG. 15, see Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The specific portion (e.g., ball stopper member 340) sets the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202) in a first state in which the game medium (e.g., game ball P) can flow down; It is possible to change to a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game medium in the guide passage forming part to flow down (for example, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game balls in the first guide path forming part 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming part 204, and a first state in which the rotating part 341 is located at the tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344. (It is possible to change into a second state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or it is difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more easily retained than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The cover part is
A first cover part provided with a retention part (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed part 336) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover part ( For example, the cover part 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330), which is different from the first cover part and is provided with the specific part;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine described in Form 18,
The second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached with a screw member (for example, the screw member N16) having a locking part (for example, the flange part F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage portion is attached to the gaming frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having locking portions (for example, screw members N11 to N14),
The screw members for attaching the storage portion and the guide path forming portion (for example, the first guide path forming portion 202) to the game frame are configured so that they fall outside the guide path forming portion even if they are removed from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the screw member that attaches the storage part is difficult to come off from the game frame, the screw member that attaches the storage part and the guide passage forming part falls outside the guide passage forming part even if it comes off, so the guide It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (e.g., ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding path forming portion (e.g., first guiding path forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3). Among them, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are used to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the storage section can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 22,
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached above the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The present invention is characterized in that the screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 23,
A game board (for example, game board 2) that can be attached and detached to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) of the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, above the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. A wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide path forming part onto the game board from bouncing back and being mixed into the guide path forming part again.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The guide passage forming part is
a first passage forming part (e.g., first guide passage forming part 202) extending downwardly toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming part (e.g., second guide passage forming part 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming part;
has
The cover part is provided along the first passage forming part so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part moves and falls from the lower end to the outside of the guiding passage forming part (FIG. 29). See A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2 to 25,
Wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position near the predetermined restriction section (for example, the recess 361) in the cover section (for example, the cover section 360 of Modification 1) so as to intersect with the guide path forming section. (See Figure 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and stay in the predetermined restriction portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located will be defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction will be defined as the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from a player located in front of the pachinko game machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a panel plate provided with a guide rail 2b (not shown), and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the panel plate. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area Y), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole, including the general winning hole, is also referred to as "winning." In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area Y, there is provided an out opening (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. It is being The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area Y using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device ( A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) for storing batted balls is provided. A payout opening is provided below the upper plate from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. Note that a ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area Y by a player's rotational operation on the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state described later (although the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Incidentally, there is no need for a "small win" to be displayed as a result of the special figure game.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, jackpot games during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, jackpot types that make the subsequent gaming state a high probability state) By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 37 (see Figure 3), an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board 91 (see Figure 3), etc. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first starting prize or a second starting winning, and if there is a winning, the CPU 103 uses random numbers such as for determining the special figure display result, for determining the jackpot type, and for determining the fluctuation pattern. is extracted and stored (stored) in the top of empty entries in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special pattern game based on the presence or absence of pending data stored in the first special pattern storage section and the second special pattern storage section, and the special pattern display result. A special system that determines (pre-determines) whether or not the fluctuating display result of a special symbol or performance symbol is a "jackpot" based on numerical data indicating a random value for judgment before the fluctuating display result is derived and displayed. Execute normal symbol processing. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special figure game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display, based on the random number stored when the starting winning occurred. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. Note that illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 on which the game board 2 is removably provided, and a game machine frame 3 with the left side of the game machine frame 3 as the center. It has a glass door frame 50 that is provided to be openable and closable in the front of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 centering on the left side so that it can be opened and closed. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back side of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishing device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4 A ball tank forming part 201 forms a storage part capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming part 201, and a first guiding path is formed to guide the game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming part 202 and a first passage forming body 203 are provided to extend in the left-right direction along the upper side 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, a terminal board 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming section 202.

The replenishment device 150 includes a guiding member 150A that includes a nozzle or the like that can guide game balls in the circulation path of the game island, and a system that sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10, etc.) of game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. A sprocket (not shown) that can drive the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) that drives the sprocket, and a sprocket (not shown) that can be pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is in the closed state closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is transferred to the ball tank forming part 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is held so that it cannot fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out to the ball tank forming section 201. is being supplied to. In addition, in the replenishing device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guiding passage forming part 204 forms a second guiding passage that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guiding passage forming part 202 downward, and a game ball guided by the second guiding passage forming part 204 is provided. A dispensing device 200 forming a dispensing unit capable of dispensing balls, and a dispensing passage for guiding game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 200 to an upper tray, that is, dispensing game balls to a player. In order to discharge the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1, A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball extraction passage forming part 206 that forms a ball extraction passage guiding to a discharge part (not shown) provided at the lower part of the back side of the machine 1 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3. It extends in the vertical direction along the left side of the back surface.

The payout device 200 consists of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and inside includes a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the ball flow path between a dispensing passage and a ball extraction passage, an operating lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Furthermore, a board case 91A in which a power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which a payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower part of the back of the gaming machine frame 3.

In this embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting game balls is provided at a predetermined location in the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be put out in the second guide path on the upstream side of the payout device 200. If the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined period of time or more, it is determined that the game balls are not being supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball jamming, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is put out. The dispensing operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can display the glass door frame 50. It is possible to execute notification processing that a replenishment error has occurred by, for example, causing a game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front surface to emit light in an error manner.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is removably disposed in an opening 221 formed in the approximate center of the game machine frame 3 from the front side of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a consisting of the above-mentioned board face plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, prize winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as the image display device 5 provided on the back side, the production device having the movable body 32, the board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is housed, the board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and plate-shaped The structure includes a cover body 220 that protects the performance device, electronic components, etc.

Note that the board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed by a base member made of a transparent synthetic resin material and a cover member so that each board can be stored therein. , are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or attached to the game board 2. The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a part of the back is an opening/closing part 220A that can be rotated around the right side. The parts can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203, the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the cover body 220 constituting the back side of the gaming board 2 are When the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, it protrudes further rearward than the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided such that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is located at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 at the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. With the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied from the circulation path above the game island to the ball tank forming section 201 via the supply device 150. .

(Mounting structure of first passage forming body 203)
Next, the attachment structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be explained based on FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the passage forming body to the gaming machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear side of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an opening 221 for attaching the gaming board 2. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Furthermore, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the back surface of the metal plate 222.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that it can cover the metal plate 222 from the back side, and screw members N1 to N5, which are attached from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction, are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing into a plurality of formed screw holes, respectively. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protrusion 224 is provided to protrude rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, there is a top wall 225A, a rear wall 225B, and left and right side walls 225C. A three-dimensional second protrusion 225 is provided to protrude rearward.

The first protruding part 224 protrudes rearward from a lower position than the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, and the spherical tank forming part 201 is disposed above the first protruding part 224. Further, the first guide passage forming part 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall part 225B of the second protruding part 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted above it. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223.

In this way, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first protrusion 224 and the second protrusion 225 that protrude rearward. Therefore, game balls and the like supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 from the upper part of the game island are prevented from entering the game board 2. In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of attachment holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and screw members N15 attached to the attachment hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into the respective screw holes. Note that the screw member N12 attached to the attachment hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 to the first passage forming body 203 for removing electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203. Moreover, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper part of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached from above into the attachment hole H16 into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 described above are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH. This is a flanged screw with a flange part F as a locking part integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by widening the ground contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is less likely to loosen compared to screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 1 to 3 mm. The length is about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

Incidentally, the sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are made of flanged screws, are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member is used. It may be attached by attaching it to a screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that, when loosened, separates from the attached part. Further, the locking portion includes a locking portion of the head NH that is formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming part 201, and the first guiding passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open top surface so that ball clogging is less likely to occur, and if ball clogging occurs, it can be easily cleared.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of a portion where game balls stacked in the vertical direction in the ball tank forming portion 201 flow into the first guide path forming portion 202. In addition, a third cover body 330 is disposed to cover the upper surface of the part where the flow flows from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the second guide passage forming part 204, so that the game ball is now rectified. However, although a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, the spherical tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, near the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arranged to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223. Further, above the pachinko game machine 1 fixed to the game island, there are screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, and various devices arranged inside the game island (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150, etc. to the frame, etc., and a plurality of screw members for assembling the plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall out due to vibrations or shocks occurring in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to the vibrations, shocks, or opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that the balls may fall into the interior from the uncovered area 350 of the guide path forming portion 202 and enter the guide path of the game ball. In particular, the replenishing device 150 and the like are arranged directly above and near the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. Because this device is prone to vibration when new game balls are supplied from the circulation path or when the game machine frame 3 is opened and closed, screw members ( (not shown) or a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishing device 150 become loose due to vibration and fall off, inside the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202. There is a very high possibility that it will fall.

If the screw member falls into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game balls flow down, and eventually get mixed into the payout device 200. If the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, balls may become clogged and the payout motor may be overloaded and malfunction, or the screw member may be damaged along with the game balls by the player. There is a risk that the player will be paid out, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as will be explained below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 may get mixed into the payout device 200 and cause the payout device 200 to be damaged or malfunction, or the screw member may be lost together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent players from paying out money.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 16. In FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIG. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming part, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line DD in (A). In FIG. 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). In FIG. 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line J-J in (A), and (D) is a top view showing the third cover body. 3 is a perspective view showing the cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing the ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a guide passage forming part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B standing on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. It is formed in the shape of a concave or groove with an opening, and has a spherical tank forming part 201 disposed on the right side and a first guide passage forming part 202 disposed on the left side. The spherical tank forming part 201 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view, and the first guide passage forming part 202 is connected to an upstream part extending diagonally backward from the left side of the spherical tank forming part 201 and a downstream part extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming part 201 in the longitudinal direction is longer than the dimension of the first guiding passage forming part 202 in the longitudinal direction, so that it can store more game balls than the first guiding passage forming part 202. has been done. Furthermore, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to be gradually inclined downward from the left side of the spherical tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is The game balls are designed to naturally flow down the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 toward the left side.

A mounting piece 261 that faces in the vertical direction is protruded from the outer surface of the standing wall part 203B on the right side of the spherical tank forming part 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 that face in the front-back direction are formed in the mounting piece 261 at the top and bottom. . Further, a mounting piece 265 is provided protruding from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction is formed in the mounting piece 265. A mounting piece 262 facing in the up-down direction is provided on the outer surface of the left vertical wall part 203B of the first guide passage forming part 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is provided on the outer surface of the upstream wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to protrude forward. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall section 203A and the rear vertical wall section 203B at the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming section 202. (See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at substantially the center in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. Furthermore, a communication hole 272 for dropping a game ball into the second guide passage forming part 204 below is formed to penetrate through the bottom wall part 203A of the downstream end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

A meandering part 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming part 202, which causes the game ball to flow down to the left side while meandering in the front-back direction, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, holes 271B to 271F are formed. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure caused by the following ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the lower portions of the standing walls 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (approximately 11 mm) of the game ball, and is twice the diameter 2R (approximately 22 mm). (11mm<L10<22mm). In other words, the first guide passage forming section 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11>L2), as will be described later, Even if N6 gets mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can fall from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 271H. It is possible to reliably make it fall out of the first guide passage forming part 202 before it reaches.

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Incidentally, dirt and dust other than the screw members, or some other members can also fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H, so that clogging of the ball due to these can be prevented.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13(A) to 13(C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the spherical tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B A mounting part 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above to the mounting part 311; a standing wall part 312 extending from the right side of the mounting part 311 toward the rear side; A plate-shaped ball holding part 313 extends in a downwardly slanting manner toward the part 201 side), a cover part 314 extends from the lower part of the vertical wall part 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming part 202 side), and It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking parts 315A to 315D that are elastically deformably formed on the front side of the part 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover part 314.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner has the mounting portion 311 attached to the spherical tank forming portion 201 with the vertical wall portion 312 disposed near the boundary between the spherical tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the front wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding part 313 is arranged to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming part 201 from above, and the cover part 314 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202. The cover part 314 is arranged so that the upper surface of the cover part 314 is slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming part 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball holding part 313 is placed on the ball tank forming part 201 side from the game island (not shown) to the ball tank forming part 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming part 202 side, they are held down by the ball holding part 313 and the flow is rectified. It is now possible to do so.

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view are formed to penetrate vertically and are arranged in a row parallel to each other. Each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C has the same front-to-back dimension L21, which is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 from falling. Note that reinforcing ribs are suspended from the periphery of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C extend along the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the long holes 316A to 316C, as shown in FIGS. 13(B) and 13(C). In this case, the game ball P can be moved in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion The right end of the cover part 324 is connected to the left end of the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310. The plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B elastically lock onto the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B in a state in which the first passage forming body 203 is brought close to each other. mounted on. In the attached state, the cover part 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game ball (Fig. 9 reference).

Concave grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 and are arranged in a row. The respective grooves 326A to 326C have different longitudinal dimensions L22A to L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C<2R). Note that the longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game balls, but can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the longitudinal dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the longitudinal dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L22A of the groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), is sized to accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, the grooves 326A to 326C extend along the downward direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, so that the grooves 326A to 326C shown in FIGS. As shown in , when the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15(A) to 15(C) and FIG. 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D that are formed to be elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface and attached from above; It mainly consists of a mounting part 331 in which a hole H15 is formed and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover part 334, and the plurality of locking parts 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover part 324 are connected to a vertical wall. At the same time, the threaded member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the threaded hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall part 203B. By inserting it, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover part 334 covers the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game balls (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and has a recessed portion 336 having a predetermined depth extending from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. A part of the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, and is therefore formed in accordance with the shape of the meandering portion 273. Furthermore, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in plan view is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 336, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side can be elastically deformed so as to swing in the vertical direction. By forming an inclined plate part 339 that slopes downward toward the right side at the right end part, the game balls P stacked up and down can be leveled while guiding them to be pressed toward the bottom wall part 203A. (See Figure 16).

The longitudinal dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is also longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size that can accommodate the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the front-to-back dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-to-back dimension L22B of the groove 326B of the cover part 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the recess 336 extends along the downward direction of the game ball and is arranged to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, the recess 336 When the game ball P falls to the top of 336, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 (L24<L2), so that ~N16 will not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in rear view, a rear wall portion 341B disposed on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating part 341 having a connecting left wall part 341C and a projecting wall part 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall part 341C, and a cylindrical shaft part 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing parts 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft part 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover part 334. Furthermore, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the upper part of the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 is covered by the cover part 324. Since the cover part 324 is arranged so as to be inclined downward so as to approach the bottom wall part 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the cover part 324 protects the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming part 202. The fluid is leveled while flowing down, and finally it is made to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, the rectifying plate 338 is elastically deformable when the game balls come into contact with it, so that it smoothes the game balls by pressing them downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stopper member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16(A), the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position where the rotating portion 341 stands upward and a tilted position where the rotating portion 341 is tilted to the right. is located in the upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game balls in the first guide path forming portion 202 to flow down into the second guide path forming portion 204; part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or cannot flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204. It is possible to change to a second state (difficult), that is, a ball-stopping state.

By setting the ball stopper member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the second guide passage forming part 204, so in this state, the game ball inside the second guiding passage forming part 204 can be controlled. It becomes possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(A), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened and consists of a front wall part 341A, a rear wall part 341B, and a left wall part 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can reside, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the rotating part 341 is tilted, but the projecting wall part 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 and with reference to FIG. 8. In FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing the board mounting frame to which the terminal board is attached, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is a LL cross section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connection section (not shown) on the back where a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 etc. is attached/detached. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the tips of the cables C are provided at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) is provided to bias the connecting pinch in the direction of closing, that is, in the direction of pinching the tip of the cable C. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation parts 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is a first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to second boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming part 202, but the second board, which has a smaller number than the first number, number (for example, 10).

A plurality of operating sections 233 are provided corresponding to each of the connection holes 231, have a substantially hook shape when viewed from the side, and are swung back and forth with the base end thereof as a swiveling axis. When the aforementioned connection pinch (not shown) is released, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation part 233 upward or downward and swinging the operation part 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation part 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Cable C is now held. The operating sections 233 arranged in the left-right direction have alternately different shapes in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operating section 233 is pressed, adjacent operating sections 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223. Further, the board mounting frame 211 has an opening 234 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, there are a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking on the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 inserted from the front side, and a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 whose movement is restricted, and a positioning piece 237 that comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 to determine the arrangement position. have Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the board is mounted by being elastically locked by the locking part 236 while the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restriction parts 235. It is attached to the frame 211. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a plurality of restricting parts 235 and locking parts 236 as mounting means different from screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which cables C can be connected, during wiring work to connect a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, the operation section 233 corresponding to each cable C is connected to the terminal board 210. need to be operated. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection etc., the cable C hanging from the top of the game island is connected to the outer frame. 60, tension may be applied to the connection part. In other words, the terminal board 210 is easily subject to load on the mounting portion, and if it is mounted to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 using screw members, the thread member may loosen and come off easily. ing.

Furthermore, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole 231 and the operation part 233 of the terminal board 210 face the back side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17(A)). ). Further, since the plurality of operation parts 233 protrude rearward substantially horizontally, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation parts 233 arranged side by side on the left and right, as described later. Furthermore, a recess 242 is formed between the lower part of the terminal board 210 and the front part of the board mounting frame 211, in which the screw members N3 to N6 can be accommodated.

(Installation status of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be explained based on FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. In FIG. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide path forming section on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. In FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 24 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. 26, (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper member in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along line U-U in (C) when the screw member is in a retained state. FIG. 27 is a longitudinal sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming part showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover part.

As shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 18, and FIG. 19(A), screw members N1 to 223 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided at the ball tank forming portion 201 and its surroundings on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. N2 and screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached toward the front from the back side at a position apart from the spherical tank forming part 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out backwards, there is a very low possibility that they will fall into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. .

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached to the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the spherical tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the spherical tank forming portion 201, from the back side toward the front. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out backwards due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached from the top to the bottom on the outer surface of the right standing wall 203B of the ball tank forming part 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming part 201, so that the pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, the possibility of it falling into the spherical tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank that receives and stores game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and receives the load of a large number of game balls. Since vibrations and shocks are likely to occur due to the arrangement around the portion 201, a flanged screw member is used, which has a large ground contact area with the attached portion and is difficult to loosen.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the spherical tank forming part 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the spherical tank forming part 201 even if they become loose and fall out, that is, the upper surface opening of the spherical tank forming part 201. Since the balls are disposed lower than the game island, there is no chance that the balls will get mixed into the ball tank forming part 201, which is open at the top to receive and store game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the spherical tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward on the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the threaded member (L30<L1). There is almost no possibility that the screw member will be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Moreover, the gap L31 formed between the rear part of the bottom wall part 203A of the spherical tank forming part 201 and the top wall part 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange part F. Since the flanged screw member is also long (L3>L2), it is almost impossible for the flanged screw member to be caught in the gap L31 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19(B), if the screw member N15 falls off from the mounting hole H15 as the mounted part and falls onto the upper wall part 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall part 220H Since the screw member N15 is tilted downward toward the back side, the fallen screw member N15 flows down either to the rear or to the left, so it is almost never held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fallen screw member N15 from getting into each of the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the ball tank forming part 201 and coming into contact with the wiring of the board and causing disconnection, etc. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20, and 21(A), screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the board A screw member N6 for attaching the mounting frame 211 to the attaching member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attaching member 223, and a third cover body 330 are attached to the first guide passage forming part 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front side and are directed forward from the back side at a position above the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the first guide passage forming part 202. In addition, the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is disposed between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko game machine If the screw members N3 to N6 become loose due to the vibration or shock generated in the first part and fall out backward, they move backward on the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a groove 227 is formed in a straight line toward the rear to avoid interference with the head NH when installing the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3. It has been extended to Note that the groove 227 is formed so that the left and right width tapers toward the rear side and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is approximately horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall into the groove 227 on the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in areas other than the groove 227. In other words, the groove 227 constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202.

Here, all screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of a head NH and a male threaded portion NS, so that when falling onto the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the periphery of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS Since the screw member N3 is often tilted with two points in contact with the tip (see Figure 22(A)), the screw member N3 tilted as shown in Figure 22(B) is subject to vibrations and shocks. Sometimes, the head NH rotates and changes its direction around the tip of the male threaded portion NS. Therefore, if it falls onto a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly rearward or the head may fall. The NH may turn to the left or right by shaking its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves rearward and curves to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310, and if it moves rearward in a straight line, it will most likely fall on the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and curves to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the horizontal wall section 264 in front of the first guide path.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves rearward to bend to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover part 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22(A), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 314, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male thread part NS is Although the head NH is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, it is locked without falling off, so that it stays on the cover part 314 without falling from the cover part 314 into the first guide passage forming part 202. I will do it. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 314 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then moved linearly toward the rear, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the horizontal wall 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 324, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the grooves 326A to 326C, or the male thread part NS and Since a part of the head NH is accommodated in the grooves 326A to 326C, it stays on the cover part 324 without falling from the cover part 324 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 324 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

In addition, if the second protruding portion 225 falls onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guiding passage forming portion 202, Remains in a tilted state. In other words, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is disposed below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a recessed portion 290 that is open at the top, so that it is accommodated and retained within this recessed portion 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 290 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is spaced forward from the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a possibility that it will fall into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is disposed below the upper edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 that is open at the top by the vertical wall 203B and the horizontal wall 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and retained in the recess 280. Become.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23(B), if the screw member N13 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 located at the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264 It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. In other words, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 214 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 24, when the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward to the right, when it moves rearward in a straight line, when it moves backward In either case, as shown in FIG. 24, when the board mount frame 211 moves to the right, it falls from the top wall 225A and from the rear end of the top wall 211H of the board mounting frame 211. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and retained in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between the vertical wall portion 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, there is a possibility that the head portion NH is retained without falling off. In other words, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of the threaded member N4 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation parts 233. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 are suspended from the top of the game island (see FIG. 3), so these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. In other words, the operating section 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. This constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

In addition, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 310, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the non-covered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330. to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P and approaches the bottom wall part 203A, It falls through one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at a position corresponding to the non-covered area 350 in the guide passage forming part 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202.

Furthermore, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming section 202. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200.

On the other hand, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward to bend to the left and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, it is accommodated and retained in the recess 336 without falling from the cover part 334 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the recessed portion 336 is designed to restrict the screw member N4 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first guiding path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding path forming portion 202. This constitutes a predetermined restriction section.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming section 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall section 203B. It is attached to the attached attachment hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves to the right, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 on the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, as shown in FIG. As described in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 in is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side contacts the ball stopper member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) that is the lower inclined side of the cover part 334, and moves downstream ( Since the movement to the left side is restricted, it stays on the cover part 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened, and the front wall part 341A and the rear wall part 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view consisting of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is located in an upright state across the passage, so that the screw member N6 is Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only disposed so as to intersect with the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so there is a possibility that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered by the front wall 341A, the rear wall 341B, and the left wall 341C, so the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted is It is possible to retain the liquid more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, and constitutes a specific part that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover part 334 in the cover part 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is located in the mounting member 223 at a position that is away from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front and right side and is above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. Although it is attached to the formed attachment hole H5, the first guide passage forming part 202 is not arranged directly behind the attachment hole H5, and the upper wall part 225A of the second protrusion 225 is also cut in the middle. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls off backward, it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that it will fall from the upper wall portion 225A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to a mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming section 202 and at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall section 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backwards, there is a high possibility that it will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 without falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc., become loose due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, shocks, or opening/closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the cover is removed. When the ball falls onto the parts 314, 324, and 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, the recess 336, and the ball stopper member 340 restrict the ball from falling onto the first guide passage forming part 202. Screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 are likely to remain on the cover parts 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover parts 314, 324, 334 into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. Furthermore, since vertical walls are formed at the left (downstream side) ends of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, it will not flow into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, the area other than the non-covered area 350 is covered with cover parts 314, 324, and 334, but the spherical tank forming part 201 Even if the supplied game ball spills and lands on the upstream side cover parts 314, 324, the front and rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the game ball P is also narrow, after rolling toward the left side, the game ball P falls from the left end of the cover part 324 to the non-covered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming part 202.

Therefore, not only can the game balls that have ridden on the cover parts 314 and 324 be returned to the first guide passage forming part 202, but also the game balls P can stay in the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the fallen screw member N stays is limited, or it comes into contact with the staying game balls and falls from the non-covered area 350 into the first guide path forming part 202. This can be prevented.

In addition, when a game ball falls onto the cover part 334, it either flows down on the cover part 334 toward the left side and is regulated by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide path forming part 202. do.

Further, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retention part and the grooves 326A to 326C as the second retention part, the groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The longitudinal dimension L22B is larger than the longitudinal dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing this, as the screw member approaches the dispensing device 200, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part, so the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming part 202. This can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and remained on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 are moved due to vibrations, impacts, etc. When falling from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall part 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming part 202 from the uncovered area 350 Even if the game ball P falls directly inside, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide path forming part 202, and approaches the bottom wall part 203A. This causes the screw member to fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 moves and enters the dispensing device 200. Contamination can be suppressed.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the spherical tank forming portion 201. There is a region where no holes are formed between the holes 270A, 270B formed in close positions and the hole 271A that is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, by forming a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed in the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming part 201 are stacked vertically and flow down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 where ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming a region in which no hole is formed in the first guide passage forming part 202 in this way, the screw member that has fallen from the first guiding passage forming part 202 is formed on the rear wall part of the cover body 220. Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 220 through the heat dissipation holes 220B (see FIG. 6) and the like can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the areas where holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming part 202, the first guiding passage forming part 202 is provided with a screw member. It is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming part 202 and to prevent the screw member falling into the first guide path forming part 202 from falling outside the first guide path forming part 202 and being mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

Further, the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be suitably inserted from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, the game ball does not fall in the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350. are stacked up and down, so the screw member is often located at the top of the game ball, but the hole 271H is located on the downstream side of the rectifying plate 338 of the cover part 334, that is. , Since the game balls are arranged in a position where they are rectified in one level up and down, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered region 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member is not covered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming part 202 from the area 350, it can fall out of the first guiding passage forming part 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the non-covered area 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the above-mentioned As shown, even if a game ball that has fallen from the non-covered area 350 to the first guide path forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves as the game ball flows down and approaches the downward direction and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability that this occurs increases, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 are removed from the first guiding passage forming part 202. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 as special retention parts that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 installed in the attachment holes H3 to H6 as the attached parts. The screw members N3 to N6, which were provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but did not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, are movable toward the cover parts 314, 324, and 334. , it is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 that have come off from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 is such that a portion of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are housed. The screw members N3 to N6 retained in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 prevent the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202. (or obstruct), but also allows the retention part to remain outside the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member can be discovered by the staff of the game parlor etc. when performing inspection etc. This makes it easier to identify which screw member has come off, making it easier to take countermeasures against screw members getting mixed into the dispensing device 200.

In addition, in the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to guide the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to the second guide. In the first state where the flow is allowed to flow down into the passage forming part 204, the rotating part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 is in the first state. It is possible to change the game ball into a second state in which it is impossible (or difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204, and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is better than the first state. By adopting a configuration in which the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, as mentioned above, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the second state when a game ball is pulled out from within the first guide path or the second guide path, that is, when a clerk at a game parlor or the like removes a game ball from a pachinko game machine. In contrast, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the staff of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as locking portions, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the first guiding passage forming part 202 and the ball so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. It is attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game balls, the ball tank forming part 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming part 202 fall off, they will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member near the peripheral portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, screw member N12 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. In addition, instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202.

Moreover, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and since vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 installed above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having a small diameter head NH that does not have a flange portion F. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is easy to fall through the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guiding path forming part 202 of the game board 2 which can be attached to and detached from the frame 3 for the game machine, a screw member that has fallen is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down toward the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward beyond the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and if the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200, thereby preventing the screw members that have fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. It can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12, so that the power generated from these drive sources is A plurality of heat dissipation holes 220B that emit heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). Preferably, the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper hole portions 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H disposed directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is , it is preferable to form them at least in positions that do not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall part 220H, or to form them in parts other than the upper wall part 220H (for example, the rear wall part, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and having an adverse effect on the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, etc.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part.

In the embodiment described above, the guiding passage forming part that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 has a first guide passage forming part that is provided so as to be inclined downwardly toward the left side. It has a guiding passage forming part 202 and a second guiding passage forming part 204 extending downward from the lower left end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 on the upper surface of the left end part so as to protrude upward. In the above, a configuration is illustrated in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover part 334 can be received and retained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover part of Modification 1 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover part 360 move toward the left end side, they do not stay on the cover part 360 and can be moved to the first guiding passage forming part 202. Since the screw member N falls directly out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end thereof, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in a case where a recess 361 in which the screw member N can be retained is formed on the upper surface of the cover part 360, a recess 361 is formed in the cover part 360 at a position near the recess 361. A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect with the downward direction of the game ball in the first guide path forming section 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P, which have stayed in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be kept by restricting their movement with the cable C.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
For example, in the embodiment, the screw members N1 to 6, N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223, the first passage forming body 203, etc. to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, Screw members (not shown) to be attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, various devices placed inside the game island (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) to the frame structure, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used when manufacturing a game machine or when playing a game. All screw members, such as screw members that remain in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, etc., can be targeted, but at least those screw members that have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance can be targeted. Preferably, the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment, the spherical tank forming part 201, which is formed in a box shape with an open top surface by the bottom wall part 203A and the vertical wall part B, is used as an example of a storage part capable of storing game media. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage part can store game balls, the front-to-back dimension may be smaller than the front-to-back dimension of the first guide passage forming part 202, like the ball tank forming part 201. It does not have to be long, and may have approximately the same front-to-back dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202 or may be shorter. Furthermore, the top surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example is given in which the payout device 200 that can pay out game balls using a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit that can pay out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls using a member other than the sprocket.

Further, in the embodiment described above, as a guide passage forming section that is open at the top and forms a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage section to the payout section, a recess whose top surface is open is formed by the bottom wall section 203A and the vertical wall section 203B. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in the shape of a groove is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a passage forming part, and its shape, size, etc. can be changed in various ways. In addition, the width dimension (front-back dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than the ball tank forming part 201, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

In addition, in the embodiment, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part capable of storing game balls, and the first guiding passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the first guiding passage forming part 202 is integrally molded, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 are separately molded. It may be integrally formed by assembling the members using screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 is also covered by the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the embodiment, a configuration in which a screw member can enter from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 The screw member may be allowed to enter through holes, notches, etc. formed on the side of the vertical wall. In addition, if a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming part 204, a predetermined restriction part for restricting the screw member from falling into the second guiding passage forming part 204, or A specific restriction section or the like may be provided to restrict the movement of the fallen screw member to the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, the entire upper surface of the first guide passage forming section 202 may be covered by the cover section.

Further, in the embodiment, the cover part that covers a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202 may be made of a separate member from the first guiding passage forming part 202, or It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance into a square tube shape.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. A fall regulating part (drop inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) falling from above the cover part, and a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of screw members on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a fall guide part such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from above the cover part to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202. Note that the means capable of regulating or inhibiting falling or movement may include not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member, or the like.

In other words, the predetermined restriction section for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is the predetermined restriction part for restricting the fall of the screw member onto the first guiding passage forming part 202. It does not just have to be something that makes it impossible for people to fall, it just needs to be something that makes it difficult to fall.

Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting parts are provided in the first guiding passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. or inhibition) may be a movement regulating section (movement inhibiting section). Note that means that can restrict or inhibit movement toward the dispensing device 200 side include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets that can attract metal screw members, adhesive portions that can adhere screw members, etc. It is preferable to provide these at a position that does not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a part where the game ball does not come into contact, such as a corner between the bottom wall part 203A and the standing wall part 203B).

In other words, the specific restriction section provided in the first guide passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the As long as it can restrict the movement to the side, it does not necessarily make it impossible for the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming part 202 to move to the dispensing device 200 side, but it can make the movement difficult. It is fine as long as it is something.

Furthermore, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, inhibited) by the specific restriction section provided in the first guiding path forming section 202, the movement is restricted. The downward movement of the game balls is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and remains in the first guide passage, and there is a high possibility that the balls will become clogged. If balls become clogged, a replenishment error notification is executed as described above, and a staff member at the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and removes the ball tank forming part 201 on the back side and the first guide path forming part. There is a high possibility that the status of the game balls in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the dispensing device 200 and remains in the first guide passage forming part 202, it becomes easier for the store staff etc. to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. It becomes possible to take appropriate measures.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size that allows the screw member to fall, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are As long as at least two of the holes 271H to 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes do not need to be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-mentioned form.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are used as the first board installed at a position lower than the first guide path forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. However, other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

Further, in the embodiment, the terminal board 210 is used as the second board mounted above the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Other substrates such as a relay board may also be used as the second board.

Further, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the performance control board 12 are attached to the game board 2 by the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed by screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various boards described above as the first board may be directly attached to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without using a board case.

In addition, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the production control board 12 have board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is housed with screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is attached to the game board 2 as a second board, is attached to the game board 2 by the attachment method, using a locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from the screw member, that is, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by a different attachment method than the attachment method using screw members, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may include a mounting means, an adhesive means using an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming part 202 to prevent the screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. Although a configuration in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied as special restriction portions for the purpose of A fall regulating part (fall inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the fall of the screw member, a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member to the first guide path forming part 202, , a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall out of the first guiding path forming portion 202 may be used. Note that means that can restrict or inhibit falling or movement toward the first guide path forming portion 202 include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, and means capable of adhering screw members. It may also be an adhesive part or the like.

In other words, the special restriction part for restricting the screw member that has come off from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is not only one that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guiding passage forming part 202; Any material that can be made difficult to fall is sufficient. For example, a convex portion serving as a fall regulating portion (fall inhibiting portion), a recessed portion or a hole serving as a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion), etc. may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the periphery of the first guide passage forming part 202 in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as special restriction parts are provided is located near the front vertical wall part 203B. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least as long as it is between the attached part (attachment hole) to which the screw member is attached and the guide passage forming part, it is not necessarily provided at a position near the vertical wall part 203B. For example, the screw member may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guiding passage forming portion.

Further, in the embodiment, a first specifying portion is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover portion 334 as a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334. Although the embodiment in which the ball stopping member 340 that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming part 202 is allowed to flow down and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to flow down is applied, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and any member provided on the dispensing device 200 side (lower inclination side) of the cover part 334 in the inclined direction can restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball-stopping function. It may also be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring holder, etc. that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the specific part may be provided at the end of the cover parts 314, 324 on the dispensing apparatus 200 side, as long as it is provided at the end of one cover part on the dispensing apparatus 200 side.

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific part is configured as a separate member from the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific part (ball stopper part) may be integrally formed in a part of the member constituting the cover part 334.

Further, in the embodiment, as an example of the locking part, a flange part F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head part NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head part NH is used. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the flange portion F may be replaced with a washer etc. that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member, or a head It also includes the rotation stopper of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), adhesive, and the like. Further, the screw member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, and includes members such as screws and bolts that separate from the attached part when loosened.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange parts F as loosening prevention parts, and the ball tank forming part 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are arranged so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. , the first guide passage forming part 202 and the spherical tank forming part 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper edge of the vertical wall 203B of the guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201, for example, it may be shifted in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201. If the screw member is attached to a position other than directly above the screw member, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the fallen screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guide portion (for example, a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). Good too.

In addition, the predetermined restriction part, specific restriction part, special restriction part, and identification part in the embodiment are not limited to the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the movement of screw members other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 is restricted or restricted (inhibited), the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and further the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming part 202 and the ball tank forming part 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferable that it be formed in a size and shape that allows (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a mode for implementing a gaming machine in the feature section 053SG according to the present invention will be described based on FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The gaming machine in the feature section 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, a slot machine, etc., and in particular, as shown in FIG. It is equipped with a gaming control board. The pachinko game machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied as the gaming machine described below, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be used as the game control board, and the performance control board 12 can be used as the performance control board. It is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors that detect input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, a sensor that specifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a sensor that identifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel. These include detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage, and detection switches for detecting door openings, abnormalities, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects input signals from these input components, and the detection status of input signals from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output parts such as a display, an LED, a motor, a solenoid, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output parts include, for example, a display that displays according to lottery results, a display that displays the progress of the game and the status of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on how to operate, and a value owned by the player. LEDs that indicate the game status, LEDs that notify the occurrence of an abnormality, motors and solenoids that operate movable parts used in games such as reels and variable winning devices.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer controls the output parts according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer, and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is carried out via a shared data bus.

Also, rather than all input circuits being connected via a shared data bus, some input circuits are directly connected to the gaming control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and are connected via a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through the input circuit.

In addition, all output circuits are configured to be connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and are connected to the shared data bus. A configuration may also be used in which output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the gaming control microcomputer is output to external equipment as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance, etc. of a gaming machine using the output data outputted as .

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be explained using Examples 1 to 3 below.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. The game control board has an electronic component mounted on one surface, no electronic component mounted on the other surface, and a terminal provided on the electronic component is soldered.In the following, the electronic component is mounted. The surface is called the mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called the soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes that penetrate through the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are made of a conductor so as to connect the through holes as appropriate. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board, an insulating region made of an insulator and a ground region made of a conductor and forming a ground are formed. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in Figure 30-2, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. , the number of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect, Designs such as detours around wiring patterns can be minimized.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-3, the wiring pattern placed on the solder side has many wires that extend in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the distance between the wiring patterns is longer than that of the wiring pattern placed on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the solder surface is obstructed by the electronic components. This is avoided.

Also, when branching a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface, and the other is formed on the mounting surface through a through hole. The wiring pattern is branched without detouring one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the input circuit and output circuit mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, so as to be lined up in the lateral direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, a large proportion of the wiring patterns extend in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction. By doing so, the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction can be directly connected to the rows of terminals arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

In addition, the input circuit and the output circuit of the electronic components having terminal rows are formed in a rectangular shape, and have a concave cutout on one of the short sides, and a surface of the input circuit and the output circuit, as shown in Figure 30-4. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. As shown in Figure 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in Figure 30-4 and the direction in which the model number is printed is from left to right, while the output circuit is , in Figure 30-4, the notches are arranged to the right, and the model number is printed in the direction from right to left. It is said that it is possible to specify whether there is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram showing the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

As mentioned above, the game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-5, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-6, electronic components such as data buses, input circuits, and output circuits are connected to wiring patterns that are formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. Connected by

In this way, when connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are soldered horizontally. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, and branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and electronic components separated laterally can be efficiently connected. In addition, since the wiring patterns that make up the data bus are formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components. Since the connection is made by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the horizontally extending wiring patterns constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of horizontally extending wiring patterns. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is determined by the antenna with maximum resonance depending on the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed to be shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, thereby preventing unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna corresponding to the bus clock is 1/2, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the board. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximum depending on the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the board. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, although the bus clock varies depending on the installed game control microcomputer and oscillator, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock that has the expected maximum frequency. It is formed to be shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, and further not to be half the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, depending on the bus clock at maximum frequency. Therefore, even if data is transmitted using a bus clock that is less than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts constituting the data bus are diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward, that is, the direction of the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts is They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the horizontal wiring pattern divided into a plurality of parts and the diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward wiring pattern are bent at an obtuse angle and connected. This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-5, mounting is carried out through through holes (A to F shown in Figure 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern that connects the horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. It is designed to branch into side wiring patterns (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in Figure 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. The wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is now branched using

In addition, in the game control board in Example 1, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. In this configuration, horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts are connected to each other by diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface. In other words, the horizontal wiring pattern is formed alternately on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the horizontal wiring pattern at a point where it switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to bypass the wiring pattern after branching. , it becomes possible to branch the wiring patterns constituting the data bus without crossing them on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated via an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground region is formed in the left region of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the right region of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-7, wiring patterns to which low voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this example) signals are transmitted are connected to the game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. Electronic components (low voltage components) are mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminals of the low voltage components are connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this example) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. The high voltage component is mounted in the right region where the second ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. This prevents unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. Furthermore, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on opposite sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor causes a gap between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, current is prevented from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed to overlap with the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface, and the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap with each other. Since the insulating area that separates the ground area and the insulating area that separates the first and second ground areas on the solder surface overlap, there is Even if a temporary potential difference occurs, interference with each other is prevented.

Figure 30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and Figure 30-11 is a diagram showing the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in this example. It is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from outside the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. The wiring from the game control board includes a signal that triggers a lottery, a signal that allows setting values that define advantages for players such as lottery probability to change to a state that can be changed, and a signal that allows changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantageousness of the game, such as signals that display information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs detection signals for error cancellation operations, and backup power supplies. Includes wiring as a supply line.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. As shown at -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, that is, the surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting parts of connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connectors such as connector numbers is printed around them. ing. Note that the information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, but may also include information regarding the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, etc.

As shown in Figure 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder side passes through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal, and the wiring on the mounting surface. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in Figures 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in connectors CN1 to CN7. It is provided at the location where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, the solder surface can be connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the game control board is attached to the gaming machine while being housed in the board case. The board case can be sealed with one-way screws, seals, welding, etc., and once sealed, it is difficult to open it without leaving traces. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the gaming machine while it is housed in the board case, the game control board is structured to be prevented from being tampered with.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control board is housed. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering part of the board case on the mounting surface of the game control board, but the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, through which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside and can be connected to external wiring.

Even when the game control board is stored in the board case in this way, there will be some gaps around the connectors CN1 to CN7 because the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to external wiring, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the terminals are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. This prevents fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Furthermore, the area around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering part of the board case, and the area covered by the covering part has wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering part, Illegal acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1-CN7 from around the portion where the connectors CN1-CN7 are exposed from the board case are reliably prevented.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the gaming control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode. A line branched between is connected to a backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a power source for driving the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer is supplied with a backup power supply VBB so that data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power source is supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

FIG. 30-14 is a diagram showing a power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the printed wiring pattern and the power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the solder side of the game control board, there are wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 that supply normal power, and wiring patterns VBB that supply backup power, as wiring patterns that constitute the power supply line. , is formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed only of the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIG. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer through only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so it is free from external noise. This prevents data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, noise is blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface, making the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side less susceptible to noise. Also, as shown in Figure 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. It is formed at a position where the number of intersections with the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is reduced in the corresponding area. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side and used for signal transmission is suppressed as much as possible.

Note that, in this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. The configuration is such that it is formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting side, but among the wiring patterns formed on the solder side, the signal that triggers the lottery Wiring patterns that transmit signals that are related to the player's interests, such as signals that control output parts, are better suited to the mounting side than wiring patterns that transmit signals that are not directly related to the player's history, such as signals that control output parts. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area, it can be used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern through which signals related to the player's profits are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, wiring patterns that transmit reset signals to the game control microcomputer and wiring patterns that provide an operating clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A location where the wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, rather than the wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there is less noise, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used to transmit signals of relatively high importance from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side used for signal transmission is minimized. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a slot machine. Slot machines are equipped with game components related to games, such as a liquid crystal display, a production control board that controls production, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit that pays out medals. When attaching the game control board to the slot machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, should be placed on the game component side. Attached to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine. When a pachinko game machine is installed in a game parlor, it is often installed so that its back faces face each other with other game devices such as other pachinko game machines. When the game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, is used for other games. It is attached so that it is placed on the device side. With this configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

(effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a proportion of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The proportion of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface is larger than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), which is different from the first direction. The ratio of wiring patterns extending in this direction is larger than that of wiring patterns extending in this direction. According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When a wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) intersects with a wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), it is possible to minimize the need for detours around the wiring pattern.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are lined up in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It has a rectangular shape, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), which can be long in distance, can be formed on the solder surface without being obstructed by electronic components.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern that branches from a first wiring pattern to a second wiring pattern, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one wiring pattern at the branch destination or to cross one wiring pattern at the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same plane, and the wiring pattern can be suitably arranged. can be formed.

(effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left and right direction), and connects a specific signal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting (input data, output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into multiple wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left/right direction). Each straight line wiring pattern that is formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left and right) has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than the According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). Each of the wiring patterns is formed shorter than the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length that corresponds to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and can prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is a wiring pattern that is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched using the space between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of a specific signal (input data, output data), This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the board. Since there is no radio wave, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) connected to a wiring pattern to which a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high voltage component) is connected to a wiring pattern through which a signal is transmitted, a first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and a second electronic component ( A high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulation part (insulation area). Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended current from flowing backward through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) signal is transmitted is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating section. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in current flowing through wiring patterns connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even if the difference in current flowing through the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so unintended current flows backward through the ground. This can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground region and the second ground region due to the capacitor, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. .

The game control board of this embodiment has a first ground area formed on one side (left side), a second ground area formed on the other side (right side) opposite to the one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component). ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are respectively formed on opposing sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

The game control board of this example has a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. It is characterized by According to such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be improved.

Note that the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area and The insulation between the second ground regions can be improved.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in corresponding areas, respectively, and the mounting surface The non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface to the other surface, interference with each other can be prevented.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is installed in a game machine while being housed in a board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side. It is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the part where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the gaming advantage (signal for transitioning to a state where the setting value can be changed, changing the setting value It is characterized by including wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display. According to such a configuration, fraudulent acts related to the advantage of the game can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting part of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Therefore, by displaying information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this area, it is possible to effectively utilize the area on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern is not formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering part that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering part. According to this configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral area of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so the connector It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portions of the connectors (CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a microcomputer for game control having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for game control can hold the memory contents of the storage means (RAM) using a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used by the microcomputer for game control. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to the semiconductor device is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface where no electronic components are mounted, so it is possible to bypass the electronic components. Since it is not necessary to form a wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is less susceptible to external noise, and it is possible to prevent data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the side of game components related to the game (such as a liquid crystal display and a performance control board that controls the performance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the other gaming machine (other gaming machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the gaming control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment has a solid area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder side. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is set to A feature is that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say, it can be done.

For example, in this embodiment, an example is explained in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls games, but other boards installed in a gaming machine, such as a board that controls performances. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a board that controls the provision of game media and gaming value, and further, a board that relays between boards.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be explained. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in Example 2 is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in Example 1, and here, mainly the different configurations from the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. .

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Furthermore, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board in the region where the wiring pattern is not formed.

Similarly to the game control board of Example 1, the game control board in Example 2 is also equipped with an input circuit and an output circuit, and these input circuits and output circuits are formed in a rectangular shape, and A concave notch is provided on one of the sides, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right. They are arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

A data bus is formed on the game control board, which is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-20, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-21, the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extends vertically in the vertical direction. .

In this way, when connecting a game control microcomputer and input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are connected to a data bus on the solder side that extends laterally. At the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, it branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through a through hole, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. becomes. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally. In addition, since the wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components, and furthermore, the data bus is connected to the input circuit and output circuit. are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this time.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-22, the data bus is connected to a noise removal circuit at a position closer to the gaming control microcomputer than any of the input circuits and output circuits connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-20, the game control board has connectors CN10 to CN17 mounted near the top side in the figure for connecting wiring from outside the game control board, and also connects a data bus. The constituting wiring pattern is formed in a region of the game control board near the bottom side in the figure, that is, a region near the other side opposite to one side where the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is secured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input/output to and from external electronic components of the gaming control board. It has become.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board receives an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used to control the game (which does not trigger the lottery). A first input circuit that detects an input from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (a sensor or switch detection signal that triggers a lottery, an advantageous Based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the movable parts such as solenoids and motors operate according to the progress of the game. A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the process, and a second output that displays various displays, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. A second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components is mounted on the game control board based on output data from the game control microcomputer, and is used to determine the payout rate etc. of the game machine when playing games over a certain period of time. A third output circuit is implemented to output an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance.

Among these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, first output circuit, second output circuit, and third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data transmission and output data transmission are performed via the data bus. will be carried out.

As shown in Figure 30-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder side branches to the mounting side through through holes at multiple locations, and vertically branches on the mounting side. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole at a position N in the figure is connected to a terminal of a third output circuit. Further, wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to terminals of the first output circuit. In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are left as they are to the outside. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through a through hole again at position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the input and output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer than the output circuit. Connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used to control the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, output signals are sent to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus. The first output circuit that outputs the output signal has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. connected to the data bus. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which would affect the operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display is other than the performance display. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the display device (second output component) that displays the progress of the game. connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display due to the placement of unauthorized parts, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting side, which is connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side, changes depending on the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and the wiring pattern branches on the mounting surface and outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Connected to the external output terminal for output to. In this way, the data bus formed on the solder surface is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole. The wiring pattern is divided into the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side is a second output component that outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the 2-output circuit, it also has a configuration in which it branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting output signals to external equipment in accordance with the progress of the game. Even with this configuration, it is possible to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment, it is possible to connect to multiple output circuits. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The second input circuit among the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position T in the diagram, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side at position T in the diagram. At this position, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side through the through hole again, and then connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, connects to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that detects an input signal from a second input component that has higher importance than the first input component is connected directly to the data bus without being connected to the data bus. It is connected to the game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since the input data based on important input signals is transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer without going through any intermediaries, the input data based on important input signals is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is connected to the game control microcomputer. The input circuit is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs output signals to electronic components (output components) based on the output data transmitted from the input circuit. Data can be prevented from being affected by noise and the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit, but the output circuit is connected to the input circuit. It is also possible to connect to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data to the gaming control microcomputer based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the gaming control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the input circuit, the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer; a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the first output circuit includes: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the second output circuit outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that it is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components, the output data may be affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part from being affected in accordance with the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. A second output circuit outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game. is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is short, which prevents output data from being affected by noise and other factors that affect the display as the game progresses. can.

In addition, like the game control board of Example 1, the first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When a two-ground area is formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to high-voltage components. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is mounted in the first ground area because it often belongs to low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground region, there is no need to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, which prevents a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface. The wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment are to be branched, so in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns, Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first input component used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit that is used to control the game control microcomputer. A second input circuit transmits input data based on input signals from two input components to the game control microcomputer, and a second output circuit transmits input data to the first output component and second output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to a gaming control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected through a through hole to the mounting surface opposite to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed, by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is said that According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is opposite to one side of the gaming control board. It is characterized by being formed in an area closer to the other side (lower side). According to this configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively. .

The gaming control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more connected to the gaming control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other display devices. By shortening the wiring pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with display contents due to the placement of illegal parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientation of the components is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first embodiment have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the modifications illustrated in the first embodiment are also applicable to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be explained. Similar to Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. In addition, the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the electronic components and through-holes mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through-holes will be explained.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of specific electronic components mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic components, and (B) is , is a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and the lower part of the specified electronic component has a mounting plate for fixing the specified electronic component to the board, as shown in Figures 30-23 (A) and (B). fixed terminals 1 and 2 that are used for the purpose of propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; is provided. Further, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be used as the specific electronic component. An electronic component that does not include a fixing terminal but only has a connection terminal may be used as the specific electronic component.

The through hole provided in the game control board consists of a normal through hole and a specific through hole. Normally, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), through-holes are plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole, so that the through-hole is connected to the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is a through-hole that conducts through. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), a specific through hole is a through hole in which copper plating is not applied to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, and the through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering a through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper plated, so the solder inside the through hole reaches the mounting surface. However, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), the inside of the through hole must be soldered because copper plating is not applied inside the through hole. This prevents solder from flowing up and reaching the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes, inserting the connecting terminals into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specified through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so when soldering, the solder It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder because it is too high on the mounting surface side where components are mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it will not be discovered even if a part is illegally replaced.Furthermore, if the model number is hidden during the type test, the component configuration cannot be identified and the test will not pass, resulting in approval. There is a risk that the terminals with the model number printed or engraved on the top may not be approved for installation at the gaming parlor because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the gaming parlor. This problem can be prevented by fixing with.

On the other hand, fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals or power from specific electronic components, so problems may occur if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldering through specific through holes. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted through a through hole and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured by the solder reaching the mounting surface.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted into a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the terminal is fixed by soldering the through hole and the terminal, forming a specific through hole to which a specific electronic component among multiple electronic components is fixed. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface is not electrically conductive, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. At this time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and causing problems.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to this configuration, the specific through hole is soldered to the specific through hole because the terminals for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are soldered to the specific through hole, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. By not doing so, there will be no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

The game control board of this embodiment has a structure in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. A configuration may also be used in which terminals (connection terminals) for transmitting component signals and power are inserted and soldered. With this configuration, solder does not rise too much to the mounting surface where electronic components are mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short circuits between terminals that transmit signals and power of specific electronic components and other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in Examples 1 and 2 are also applicable to Example 3.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As explained above, the feature section 053SG includes the following inventions. In other words, conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have generally been equipped with a board on which electronic devices are mounted, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-93428. As this type of board, one has been proposed that inputs and outputs data between a control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment using one data bus. In this type of board, various problems exist regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is suitably formed, the gaming machine of feature part 053SG (1) is as follows:
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. includes a data bus that is
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means outputs data to the electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means. Since the wiring pattern up to the control means is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the output circuit that outputs the signal, input data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine (3) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (soldering surface) on which the data bus is formed by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine (4) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3),
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) opposite to the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively.

The gaming machine (5) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (gaming control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more effective than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the other display device. The device is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern up to the microcomputer (for use with the computer) is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other indicators, so it is possible to prevent unauthorized parts from being used. It is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the display contents by changing the arrangement of the display.

The gaming machine (6) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the board so that their components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily understand the difference between an input circuit and an output circuit.

The gaming machine (7) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine (8) of feature part 053SG is
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the first output circuit outputs the output signal to the second electronic component that performs the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise etc. This can prevent the operation of the parts from being affected.

The gaming machine (9) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected to the data bus through a through hole. A first wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal to an external device in accordance with the progress of the game.
According to this feature, the data bus formed on the second side is connected to the first side by using the wiring pattern on the first side through the through hole to perform output according to the progress of the game on the first side. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern is formed on the second side in order to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, respectively. Since there is no need to branch the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The gaming machine (10) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
a first input that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer); A circuit (first input circuit) and input data based on input signals from a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). A second input circuit (second input circuit) transmits to the microcomputer) and a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component);
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being influenced by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine (11) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit that transmits data to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise etc., so the display changes according to the progress of the game. can be prevented from affecting.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls may be placed inside the game machine. The ball is recyclably enclosed, and the number of balls lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which games are stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that can store gaming media (for example, gaming balls P). A storage section (e.g., ball tank forming section 201), a payout section (e.g., payout device 200) capable of dispensing game media, the upper surface of which is open and guides the game media in the storage section to the payout section. A guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202 or the second guide passage forming part 204) that forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage), and a guide passage forming part of the guide passage forming part. A cover part (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface and the pseudo movable body display are moved from the first display position to the first display. A display means capable of moving to a second display position different from the first position, a movable body movable from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect. The cover part is provided with a predetermined restriction part (for example, a long one) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. Holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and a recess 336) are provided in the guiding passage forming part (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part is moved to the dispensing part. A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting the movement (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the effect execution means controls the pseudo movable object display to the first A pseudo movable object display effect that moves and displays the movable object from the display position to the second display position, and a movable object effect that moves the movable object from the first position to the second position, and the effect execution means Therefore, when the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed in the predetermined period, the effect execution means executes the pseudo movable body display effect without executing the movable body effect in the predetermined period. One example is a gaming machine that is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the game is executed.

According to such a configuration, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

In other words, by preventing screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guiding passage forming section or the dispensing section, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to malfunction, and the player can also Since the user pays attention to the performance in anticipation of the movable body performance being executed, the interest of the performance can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to break down and more likely to attract players' interest when installed in a gaming parlor.

Furthermore, the gaming machine can prevent screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guide passage forming section or the payout section, and can draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable object presentation and the pseudo movable object display presentation. As an example of the form, there is provided a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that can move and display a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position. Display means, a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position, and a performance execution means capable of performing a performance, the performance execution unit configured to display the pseudo movable body display. A pseudo movable object display effect in which the movable object is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable object effect in which the movable object is moved from the first position to the second position, It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. Examples include gaming machines that are controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the body display performance is executed. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Characteristic part 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from an origin position to a production position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are the same direction ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are the same downward direction),
The movement of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the first pseudo The movement amount L2 of the movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2 (see FIG. 40-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the pseudo movable body, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the movable body, thereby surprising the player.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Equipped with a display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo movable body display causes a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first presentation position) different from the first position. It is a display imitating a movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be carried out,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 On the display device 5, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. some part),
The pseudo-movable body display displays a reaction movement of a specific amount of movement when moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100). (a part that displays a reaction action (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount when moving and displaying from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopping and displaying at the first effect display position),
The specific movement amount is larger than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (See Figure 40-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo-movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and it is also possible to simulate the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from an origin position to a production position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the second display position). (portion that can be moved and displayed in one direction display position),
a movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed (for example, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development using the mounted movable body 32 When the performance A and the developed performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the control is made into a jackpot game state than when the developed performance B is executed without the developed performance A being executed. (expectation of jackpot) is high (see Figure 40-11),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

The A4 format gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a second pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5). (a part that can be displayed by moving the Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A special suggestion performance that suggests that the pseudo movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by displaying the pseudo movable object display (for example, a preview performance A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot);
A notification performance that notifies players of content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development performance B that notifies that the game will develop into a strong super reach performance);
A predetermined effect (for example, development effect B) that is executed before the notification effect and indicates that the notification effect is to be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) related to the notification effect. development suggestion that suggests the possibility of implementation), and
is executable,
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) in which the degree of expectation for the notification effect to be executed differs;
The display means is
In the special suggestion effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ( See Figures 40-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined effect, after displaying the pseudo movable object display at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display is hidden without moving from the second display position to the first display position (Fig. 40-26(A) ) to (J), see Figure 40-27 (A)),
Before executing the notification effect and when hiding the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position, the notification related image (for example, Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 40-26(F) to (J), FIG. 40-27(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable object display moves in the same way as the movable object as a structure, so attention is paid to whether it can be controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the notification-related image over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable object, without returning from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is not displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the notification effect.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to a first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, a part that can be displayed by moving the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5) ,
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a special performance that notifies that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a decision performance that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state);
A specific performance that suggests that the special performance will be executed before the special performance is executed (for example, a development performance B that notifies that the final performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance);
is executable,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the specific performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. The image is hidden without being moved to the position and displayed, and a suggestive image suggesting execution of the special effect (for example, the mode at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. It is possible (see Figure 40-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the special performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. move to a position and display it, then hide it (see Figures 40-30 (A) to (F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the suggestive image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure, and moves from the second display position to Since it is hidden without returning to the 1 display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion that the special effect is to be executed. On the other hand, in the special effect, the pseudo movable object display is displayed moving in the same way as the movable object. , it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The game machine of form A6 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first production display position),
The display means is
moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position);
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (Fig. 40-40 (A) to (C)),
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo movable body display (for example, an image where glass is cracked and shows a plurality of glass fragments) It is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which Z71A is scattered (see Figure 40-31),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and by emphasizing the moving display with a specific image, it is possible to give a favorable impression of the moving display to the player. can.

The gaming machine of form A7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display including a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 Moving the display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and moving the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5. (a movable and displayable part),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 40-16(B));
The second pseudo movable object display can be moved and displayed from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 40-16(C));
The display means is
The first pseudo movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 40-40 (A) to (C)). ),
A movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame. (See Figures 40-40(A) to (C)),
Display of movement of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position; and Display of movement of the second pseudo movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. (For example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is faster than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.) faster than the movement display from to the first specific effect display position (see Figure 40-40),
When the first pseudo movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo movable object display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on when it is displayed (for example, in preview performance B, a pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position) When PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 that is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position is executed, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the pattern PBY-1 that is moved and displayed at the display position or the pattern PBY-2 that is moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is executed. (See Figure 40-10, Figure 40-20 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which one of the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display is displayed in a moving manner, and the first pseudo movable body display has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state. The player can recognize the movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display by the difference in speed of the moving display.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
A movable body (for example, a first non-mounted movable body M100) that is movable from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first production position) different from the first position;
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a reaction movement of a certain amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 40-36);
When the pseudo movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific movement amount is performed (see FIG. 40-36);
The specific amount of movement is larger than the certain amount of movement (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (see Figure 40-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo-movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and it is also possible to simulate the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A8,
A movable body (for example, a mounted movable body 32) that can be moved from a first position (for example, an origin position) to a second position (for example, a performance position) different from the first position,
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g. movement display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (e.g. movement distance L1) (Fig. 40-16),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the pseudo movable object display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the movable object, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
The pseudo movable body display includes a performance display section (for example, performance display section Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display section (for example, mechanism display section Z100B, Z200B),
In the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display section reaches the second display position before the effect display section (see FIGS. 40-36 (B1) and (B2));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement display of the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the first display position is faster) The movement amount L2 of the body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2 (see FIG. 40-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A11,
The movement period of the movable body between the first position and the second position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases (see FIG. 40-39(A). )reference),
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 40-39(B));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the moving display of the pseudo movable object display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable object.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The pseudo movable object display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of displaying the light-emitting display section by emitting light when the pseudo-movable object display is moved to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 to the first display position). After moving to the production position and displaying it, the part that executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display part Z108A at almost the same cycle (see Fig. 40-31 (D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A13,
The pseudo movable object display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not display the light emitting display section when moving the pseudo movable body display (see FIG. 40-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not highlighting the (incomplete) pseudo-movable object display during the moving display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine described in form A13 or form A14,
The movable body includes a light emitting section capable of emitting light (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means, when moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display to the second display position, performs a light emitting display of the light emitting display section in a manner common to the light emission of the light emitting section (the effect control CPU 120 After moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, the part where the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at almost the same cycle. See Figure 40-31 (D). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 (portion where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
a direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position; a direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first special display position to the second special display position; are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A, and the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the preview performance A), and This is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 40-33),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since one pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a direction different from the direction in which it is moved and displayed. Can be displayed movingly (see Figures 40-43),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

FIG. 31 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 32, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the mounted movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable mounting body 32 to the movable mounting body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable mounting body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 controls audio output, lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the mounted movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the mounted movable body 32, etc.). It may also be executed.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 34 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The production control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 33 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 36 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 36(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 36(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 36(A).

As shown in FIG. 36(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 36(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 37, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable mounting body 32, such as driving the movable mounting body 32 to return it to the original position and performing predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the mounted movable body Controls for operating various production devices, such as drive operations of 32, are performed. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 39, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the mounted movable body 32 , outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal) Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 40-1 to 40-40. In addition, in the following, detailed explanations will be omitted by assigning the same reference numerals to structures that are similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation, or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc., but have similar functions. Mainly the points that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 40-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is formed slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 40-2, a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. is considered possible. Further, a button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the production control CPU 120 can turn on/off the button LED 62.

FIG. 40-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 40-3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 40-3 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-3 (B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) that is transmitted when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that is transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being temporarily stopped. When power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, sends an initialization designation command. Send commands.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for specifying execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance, and as described later, is executed when neither the first pending memory nor the second pending memory exists in the special symbol normal processing. This command is sent based on the demo display settings, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demonstration designation command was sent.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 40-3(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 40-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 40-4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. As described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data representing part of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 40-5(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 40-5(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the case of the first special figure special figure game and the case of the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 40-6(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 40-6(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types include high-accuracy control and time-saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as that of the variable jackpot C. This is an open period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is determined to be a "probable variable jackpot C" or a "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 40-7). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, so from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of a jackpot game or a small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 40-6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 40-6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the super reach variation pattern, normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation level (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach variation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Further, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach variation pattern may be of only one type, similar to the normal reach variation putter.

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this embodiment includes a special winning variation pattern (corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C"). PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 40-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Also, among the super reach variation patterns, for the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns, the variable display period is longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the super reach α variation pattern. has been done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 40-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the gaming state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and the corresponding Using fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot, change the fluctuation patterns into PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern). Determine from. In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B in the normal gaming state (low base state), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variable display result. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-8(A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is It's different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. Assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability jackpot B, the variation pattern of the super reach is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. In addition, since super reach β is easier to determine than super reach α, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, since the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and the case where the variable display result is a small win, the player can change the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "off", the special figure variable display time is changed from the normal one based on the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure being 3, 4, etc. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher with shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3) that are shorter than non-reach variation patterns (PA1-1), thus preventing games from becoming too long. At the same time, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-8(B), if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the high base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (Super Reach α Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach β Jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern). Jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B in the low base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot) .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-8(B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the determination values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 are The number of allocations is different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. 250 judgment values are allocated to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 50 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. , 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability jackpot B, the variation pattern is higher than that of super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern is easier to determine, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, since the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and the case where the variable display result is a small win, the player can change the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach β deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Ten determination values are assigned to PA2-3, and seven determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is "off" in the high base state (time saving state), based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time will change compared to the normal non-reach Since the variable display is executed more frequently with the shorter variable pattern (PA1-4) than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display results are It is possible to shorten the time it takes to hit the jackpot. Note that the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are fluctuation patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in this embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control timer setting section. It includes a control counter setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 40-2 is provided with a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponds to the variable display being executed due to the pending memory of the first special figure, and the buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1 corresponds to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the first special figure. -4, Buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed due to the pending memory of the second special figure, Buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the second special figure The data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is set up with entries that can store data such as starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, pending storage number notification command, etc. in association with each of them. It is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The four commands that make up one set, the starting opening prize designation command, the symbol specification command, the fluctuation category specification command, and the pending storage number notification command, are the buffer numbers corresponding to the starting opening winning prize specification command and the pending storage number notification command. is stored in the entry.

The storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1") when the start condition is satisfied. ), the contents of the buffer number ``1-0'' that stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is met are shifted upward one by one as described later. , is cleared in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends. Similarly, the storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "2") when the start condition is met. -1"), the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later, and the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later. The stored contents are cleared in a special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 sends a command to the beginning of an empty entry among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4 of the receiving command buffer (the lowest buffer number). When a starting prize is entered into the second starting winning slot, the starting winnings are stored starting from the beginning of the empty entry among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (the entry with the lowest buffer number). . At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning is an entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2- The data stored in the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1" is deleted and stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol pending memory is finished, each command stored in buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in buffer number "1-1". Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". The commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". be done. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Production during super reach)
Here, the performance during super reach will be explained based on FIG. 40-9. FIG. 40-9 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 40-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, a super reach effect (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect) is performed as a variable display effect based on the variable display mode being set to the super reach effect. After finishing the reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

In addition, in the normal reach performance in the normal reach variation pattern or super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the performance control CPU 120 determines the possibility (expected) that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a performance different from the variable display performance. It is possible to execute a preview performance A or a preview performance B that foretells the event (degree). Further, in the normal reach performance in the super reach variation pattern, it is possible to execute a development performance A that notifies the player that the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls a development performance B that notifies that a weak super reach performance in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player). It is possible to execute a development-suggesting performance that suggests the possibility that It is possible to execute development effect B that notifies the user of the content).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a determined performance that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in a strong super reach performance in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ). .

In this way, in the variation pattern where the normal reach is off, the normal reach effect will not develop into a weak super reach effect and result in a jackpot or miss, and in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the weak super reach effect will occur in the normal reach effect. In the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), a weak super reach performance develops into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reaches with higher expectations than weak super reach (jackpot expectation; normal reach < super reach). α<super reach β<super reach γ).

In addition, for normal reach and super reach α, β, and γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, or super reach effects of common or at least partially similar types may be executed. It may be executed. Further, the types of super reach are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the characteristic part 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A, preview performance B, development performance A, B, development suggestion performance, and final performance, the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, may be moved, and the first pseudo movable body display described later. It is possible to move and display the second pseudo movable body display. Therefore, before explaining the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Flow of development of pachinko machines)
First, in order to understand how the pachinko gaming machine 1 was equipped with the above-described mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display, second pseudo movable body display, etc., we will explain the development of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The outline of the flow will be explained based on FIG. 40-12. FIG. 40-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 40-12, when the development of a given pachinko machine (for example, pachinko machine 1) begins, the first step is to clarify what to convey to the game parlor and players, and what they want them to feel. A proposal is created based on the specifications (step 241SGS001). Specifically, consideration will be given to the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation structure such as reach, board structure, movable objects (structures), etc. for the relevant machine.

Next, based on the proposal, prototypes (primary prototypes, design mocks) of the board (gaming board), videos and materials that can be visualized with variable displays, spec confirmation tables, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but there were reasons why it was not possible to mount multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc.) Problems such as durability may occur.

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, regarding the production video, based on the design and motion of the movable body that could not be mounted due to a problem in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display video that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is created. . Furthermore, since the movement display using the pseudo-movable object display has a lower impact than when moving a movable object that is not mounted, for example, the reaction display operation when the moving object is displayed and stopped, or the speed of the movement display is lower. It is often displayed in a deformed manner (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, create a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board (gaming board) that includes images of variable displays and effects, and check the variable displays, core effects, movement of movable objects, etc. (step 241SGS004), If there is no problem, molds and the like for the board (game board) are created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide players with an impactful performance, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect and diversify the performance, but due to the various problems mentioned above, it is not possible to actually It is often difficult to install multiple devices. Therefore, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted, a moving display of a pseudo movable body display that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is increasingly used.

In the following, the pachinko game machine 1 as the feature part 241SG was planned to be equipped with a plurality of movable bodies at the development stage, but due to the various problems mentioned above, one movable body ( For example, it has been decided to mount the movable body 32), and the other movable bodies (for example, the first movable body M100 and the second movable body M200) have not been determined to be mounted, so they are not mounted. In place of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a movement display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are used. A description will be given assuming that the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display is adopted.

In addition, in the above example, the pseudo movable body display was adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, which were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention applies to this. Although it is possible to mount a movable body, there are cases where a pseudo movable body display is intentionally used in order to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not scheduled to be installed at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body, a movable body that is installed or scheduled to be installed in another model, etc.).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounting movable body 32 will be explained below based on FIG. 40-13. FIGS. 40-13 are diagrams in which (A) shows a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 40-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a production section 32A and a mechanism section 32B, which are formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front surface. By supporting the left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B extending in the left and right sides, respectively, by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, the upper origin position (FIG. 40-13 (A) It is possible to move vertically between the origin position (indicated by a solid line in ) and the production position below the origin position (the position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 40-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the performance section 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L, 201R include mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, drive gears 203L, 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, and driven gears 204L, 204R that mesh with the drive gears 203L, 203R. , rotation shafts 205L, 205R that face in the vertical direction and have driven gears 204L, 204R fixed to their lower ends, movable bodies 206L, 206R inserted into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R, and mounted movable body 32 are held at the origin position. It mainly includes mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R that can be mounted, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 40-2) that is built in the production section 32A and can emit a light emitting part 208A consisting of the letter "X".

In the mounted movable body 32, the left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism section 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are locked by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R. This allows it to be held at the origin position. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the home position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped by its own weight from the home position, and the left and right ends of the mechanism section 32B are comes into contact with the movable bodies 206L, 206R and is restricted from moving downward, thereby stopping at the presentation position.

Further, a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L, 205R, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked in the groove 205A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable bodies 206L, 206R. Since the rotary shafts 205L and 205R are formed and rotation around the rotary shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, it is possible to move vertically by rotating the rotary shafts 205L and 205R in forward and reverse directions using the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the production position by its own weight, and after falling, the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shaft 205L as shown in FIG. 40-13(B). , 205R to raise the movable bodies 206L and 206R, they rise from the production position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable object)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIG. 40-14. In FIGS. 40-14, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

The first pseudo movable object display Z100 shown in FIG. 40-14(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 40-14(B), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the first non-mounted movable body M100.

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a production section M100A and a mechanism section M100B, which are formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated with decorations etc. The left side of the mechanism section M100B extending leftward is supported by the drive mechanism M101 disposed on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 40-14(B)) It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the origin position (indicated by the dotted chain line) and the first presentation position below the first origin position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 40-14(B)).

The drive mechanism M101 includes a movable motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to a drive shaft of the movable motor M102, a driven gear M104 that meshes with the drive gear M103, and a driven gear M104 fixed to a lower end thereof and facing in the vertical direction. A rotation axis M105, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a movable body M106 inserted into the rotation axis M105, and built in the production part M100A, when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a circular light emitting portion M108A and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

In addition, the effect part M100A has a striped decoration on the front side and has four effect movable parts M110A to M110D arranged around the light emitting part M108A, and the effect movable parts M110A to M110D are arranged in the first part adjacent to each other. It is possible to change between a presentation state (the state shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 40-14(B)) and a second presentation state in which the presentation movable parts M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting part M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is configured such that the left end part (guided part) of the mechanism part M100B is inserted (guided) into the rotation shaft M105 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is locked by the movable body solenoid M107. 1 It is held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the first origin position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped by its own weight from the first origin position, and the mechanism part M100B The left and right end portions of the movable body M106 come into contact with the movable body M106, and downward movement is restricted, so that the movable body M106 is stopped at the first performance position.

Further, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M105, while a locking portion (not shown) capable of locking in the groove M105A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable body M106, and Since the rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, the rotation axis M105 can be moved in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation axis M105 in forward and reverse directions using the movable body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted movable body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotation axis M105 to move the movable body M106. By raising it, it rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 40-14(A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and includes a production display section Z100A corresponding to the production section M100A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z100B corresponding to M100B and a light emitting display section Z108A corresponding to light emitting section M108A. The display can be moved in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 40-16(B)). ), the display can be moved in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position (Fig. 40-17(A)). Furthermore, the production section M100A has production movable display parts Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the production movable parts M110A to M110D, and a first production display state corresponding to the first production state and a second production display state corresponding to the second production state. It is possible to change the performance display state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable object)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIG. 40-15. 40-15, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

The second pseudo movable object display Z200 shown in FIG. 40-15(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 40-15(B) and (C), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the second non-mounted movable body M200 that has been mounted.

Regarding the second non-mountable movable body M200, at the beginning of development there were two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 40-15(B) and mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 40-15(C)). Mounting plan 2) was devised, but due to development reasons, the second non-mountable movable object itself could not be mounted, so as the second pseudo movable object display Z200, a movement corresponding to mounting plan 1 explained below was used. display and a moving display corresponding to installation plan 2 can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-15(B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, has a production part M200A which is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front and has decorations on the front surface. The lower end of the mechanism part M100B is supported by the first drive mechanism M201A disposed below the image display device 5 (installation plan 1: FIG. 40-15). B)), and a second presentation device (installation plan 2: see FIG. 40-15(C)) supported by a second drive mechanism M201B in which the upper end of the mechanism part M100B is disposed above the image display device 5. are incorporated into each of the.

As shown in FIG. 40-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A includes a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, and a rotating body rotated by the movable body motor (not shown). M203, and a guide rail M204 that guides the production section M200A in a vertically movable manner. The mechanism part M200B has one end supported so as to be rotatable about a rotation axis pointing in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member M202, and a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral edge of the front surface of the rotary body M203 that slides. A long hole M206 is formed into which it can be inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A rotates the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotates the mechanism part M200B around the rotation axis. The first specific origin position below (the origin position indicated by the two-dot chain line in Fig. 40-15(B)) and the first specific production position above the first specific origin position (indicated by the solid line in Fig. 40-15(B)) It is possible to move vertically between the two positions.

In addition, the production section M200A includes a rotating section M207 that is circular in front view, and a plurality of (for example, 5) light emitting sections M208A to M208E provided on the rotating section M207 with non-mounted movable LEDs (not shown) that can emit light. , the non-mounted movable LED (not shown) lights up while the rotating part M207 rotates, and the light emitting parts M208A to M208E can emit light in multiple colors (for example, 7 colors). There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B includes a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, and a driven gear that meshes with the drive gear M213. M214, and a rotation shaft M215 that faces in the left-right direction and has a driven gear M214 fixed to the left end thereof. Further, a spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, and a mechanism section M200B extending upward from the production section M200A has a locking mechanism on the inner circumferential surface that can be locked in the groove M215A. (not shown), and rotation about the rotation axis M215 is regulated.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B rotates the rotation axis M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, thereby moving the second non-mounted movable body M200 to the second specific origin position on the left side (Fig. 40-15 (C ), the second specific production position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 40-15(C)) is movable in the left-right direction, and the second specific origin It is possible to stop at a second intermediate performance position between the position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 40-15(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200, and includes a production display section Z200A corresponding to the production section M200A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to M200B, a rotating display section Z207 corresponding to rotating section M207, and light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to light emitting sections M208A to M208E.

In addition, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable object LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED, but the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 By doing so, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, seven colors) without considering cost.

The display can be moved in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (Fig. 40-16 (C)), the display can be moved in the left-right direction between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position (see FIG. 40-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be described based on FIGS. 40-16 and 40-17. In FIG. 40-16, (A) shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable body, (B) shows the movable display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) shows the movable display area of the second pseudo movable body display. It is a diagram. FIGS. 40-17 are diagrams in which (A) shows a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (B) shows a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 40-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the presentation part 32A overlaps the upper part of the display area of the image display apparatus 5, and an abbreviation of the display area of the image display apparatus 5. It is possible to move vertically between a production position where the production section 32A and the mechanism section 32B overlap in the center, and the moving distance from the origin position to the production position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 40-16(B), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 has a first initial display position where the lower part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5; The first initial display is movable in the vertical direction between a first effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position approximately below the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first initial display. The moving display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 40-17(A), the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 has a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position substantially above the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first specific effect display position can be moved in the vertical direction. The specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, has a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. Not only can the movable range between them be moved up and down, but also specific movement is possible between a second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and a second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position. The range can be displayed by moving up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-16(C), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial stage in which the lower part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display is movable in the vertical direction between the display position and a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, The moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-17(B), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is a second specific display in which the right part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display can be moved in the left-right direction between the initial display position and a second specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5. , the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, displays the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific performance corresponding to the first specific performance position. Not only can the movable range between the display position and the display position be moved in the vertical direction, but also a second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and a second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position It is possible to move and display a specific movable range between the positions in the left and right directions.

Further, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. (L2>L1>L3). Further, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. and movement display distance L2A (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can move and display a movement display distance (L2, L2A, L3A) that is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable object 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more impactful performance than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 40-16, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are composed of effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B. is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that the display is performed as if by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5. Since the display sections Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to more realistically express a moving display.

In other words, a pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) refers to a movable object as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable object mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a movable object not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a virtual movable object, etc. This is a simulated display and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 40-25(H)).

In addition, some display modes may be different from those of the modeled movable body, displays that cannot be realized with the modeled movable body (for example, deformed display, deformed display, etc.), or movement displays (for example, high-speed movement display, etc.) ) is possible as long as it is possible.

In addition, the pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) may be an image or moving image created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or moving image of an actually created movable object as a structure. There may be. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable object displays move, sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects that are output when moving the movable object or the impact sounds that occur when the movable object stops are output, and the pseudo-movable object displays are displayed in a dramatic manner. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc., and the speakers 8L and 8R output deep bass to generate a pseudo shock, making it more realistic. It becomes possible to provide performances to players.

Next, details of various effects using the above-described mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display Z100, and second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using FIG. 40-10. FIG. 40-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various effects in Super Reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in FIG. 40-10, the preview effect A is executable when the base state is low, and the first specific effect is executed after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. After being moved to the display position, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E display light in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby suggesting the possibility (expectation level) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 40-25 (C) to (F)).

In detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light emitting display parts are displayed in white. The display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue. When pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. When pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. Displayed in red. Therefore, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of jackpot is red. Note that the emitted light color can be changed in various ways, and if a jackpot is confirmed, the emitted light may be made to emit gold or rainbow colors.

(Preview performance B)
Preview effect B is executable when in the high base state, and the first pseudo movable object display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a jackpot depending on whether the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. This suggests the possibility (expectation level) of

Furthermore, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (Figure 40-34 (A) (See ~(C)). In addition, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (Figure 40-34 (D) (See ~(F)).

Further, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 40-33 (See (A) to (C)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 40-33 (See (D) to (F)).

More specifically, when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position. is displayed, and when pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when pattern PYB-3 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The image is moved to the display position and displayed. Therefore, when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the moving display pattern with the highest jackpot expectation is the first This is a pattern in which the pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

In addition, it is better for the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to move and display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and for the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to move from the second effect display position to the second effect display position. This is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development performance A)
In the development effect A, the development to a weak super reach is notified by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 40-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the production position, rises from the production position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing, and the development to weak super reach occurs. will be notified (see Figure 40-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the production start timing, and the development to weak super reach is notified by displaying the development notification image Z300 on the image display device 5. (See Figure 40-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is determined that notifies the development to weak super reach by displaying the development notification image Z300 without causing the mounted movable body 32 to fall. It is.

Incidentally, the development notification image Z300 is an image (display) imitating the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, it is similar to the movable body. Unlike the pseudo movable object display that is displayed moving, it is an image (display) that only imitates the effect section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable object 32. For example, at the performance start timing, the display is displayed from the beginning at the performance display position corresponding to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 without any moving display.

(Development suggestion performance)
The development suggestion performance can be executed before development performance B is executed, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved and displayed to the first specific performance display position. After that, the light is emitted based on the fact that the repeated tapping operation of the push button 31B by the player (operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a predetermined period) is detected during the valid operation period. By changing the display parts Z208A to Z208E to the light emitting display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310, which will be described later, may be executed, that is, the possibility that the advanced effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B during the valid operation period in which the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion performance is valid. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the button LED 62 (see FIG. 40-2) built into the push button 31B is lit without displaying the button on the image display device 5, the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B is promoted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 may display an operation promotion display that promotes repeated pressing of the push button 31B during the valid operation period.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is such that the character image Z310 related to the model is in the first specific display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act) with the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 40-26(A) to (J) and Figure 40-27(A)).

More specifically, when pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, and do not change. When pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change from white to blue in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E changes in the order of white → blue → green according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E change from white → blue → according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Changes from green to red. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest degree of expectation for execution of the advanced effect B is red.

Note that the emitted light color and the change pattern of the emitted light color can be changed in various ways. For example, the emitted light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the emitted light display color may be set as a color other than white from the beginning. . In addition, the number of lights on the plurality of light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E is increased in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, so that the degree of expectation for the execution of the development effect B is higher when the number of lights on is larger than when the number of lights is small. You can. Furthermore, the degree of expectation may vary depending on the color of the emitted light and the number of emitted light.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, if the repeated press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period, or if the amount of repeated press operation is small, even if any of patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined, the exemplifies a mode in which the luminescent display color does not change according to each pattern PS-2 to PS-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period. Alternatively, even if the amount of repeated tapping operations is small, the light emitting display color may be changed to correspond to the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

Furthermore, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is a character image Z310 of a color corresponding to the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. There is.

Note that character images Z310 of different types may be displayed depending on the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. Furthermore, even if the light emitting display colors of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E do not change even though one of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined as described above, the determined pattern PS-2 to PS-4 The character image Z310 may be displayed in a color corresponding to the color (different color from the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E). Further, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development performance B)
The developed effect B is that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing the decisive effect (game content that is advantageous to the person) is notified (see Figure 40-27(D)). Further, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (Figure 40-27 ( (See D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner that indicates that it is the time to start displaying the image, the variable display result becomes a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ) is suggested.

In detail, if execution is determined in the advanced performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing. By moving and displaying, the development to a strong super reach is announced (see Figure 40-27 (D)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. The development to a strong super reach is notified by displaying it in a ready state (see FIG. 40-27(C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development effect B type determination process, the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a prepared state without moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200, thereby leading to a strong super reach. The effect is to determine a performance pattern that informs the development of.

(Decision performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between an ally character and an enemy character that was being executed in the super reach performance, and notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after a display is performed in which the friendly character deals the final blow to the enemy character, a display is performed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is The enemy character is moved by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected and the operation valid period ends. Either a confirmed jackpot notification in which the character is defeated and wins the battle, or a confirmed loss notification in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position and is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a failure, and are patterns in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character and loses the battle, and a failure confirmation notification is performed.Patterns KB-2 and KV-2 is a pattern that is selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a jackpot confirmed notification is performed in which the ally character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. Then, a vibration effect is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position at the falling timing of the mounted movable body 32. After moving to , a jackpot confirmed notification is performed, and after returning from the production position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first production display position and displays the variable decorative pattern. The display will resume. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a jackpot (Fig. 40 -29 (E) to (G), see Figures 40-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, when it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the movable mounted body 32 does not move from the origin position at the timing of the fall of the movable mounted body 32, and the effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. A failure confirmation notification is performed, and the variable display result becomes a failure (see FIGS. 40-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, regarding the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the advanced performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) , will be explained based on FIG. 40-11. FIG. 40-11 is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced presentation A and the advanced presentation B.

As shown in Figure 40-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Yes, pattern B is a pattern in which the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set to increase in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C<pattern D. That is, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed. Also, the ratio of control to a jackpot game state when development performance A and development performance B are executed is higher than when development performance A is executed without execution of development performance B (jackpot expectation level) is high. Furthermore, when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is higher than when the advanced performance A and the developed performance B are not executed.

FIG. 40-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277), and if it is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277). ;Y), executes the preview effect type determination process shown in FIG. 21(A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the advanced performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When the pattern is not a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), the process advances to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 40-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is a low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the preview performance is determined. At the same time, the performance pattern of the preview performance A is determined using the preview performance type determination table A shown in FIG. 40-20(A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in the low base state, that is, if it is in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), a random number for determining the preview effect is extracted, and a table B for determining the preview effect type shown in FIG. 40-20(B) is extracted. The performance pattern of preview performance B is determined using (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 40-20(A), in the table for determining the type of preview effect A, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different determination value is assigned to each of them so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 40-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, if a variable display results in a variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" will be determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYA-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 40-20(B), in the table for determining the type of preview effect B, "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different determination value is assigned to each of them so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 40-20(B) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate. PYB-3'' is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYB-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the type of preview performance A for the low base state and the table for determining the type of preview performance B for the high base state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be made different between the table for determining the type of preview performance A and the table for determining the type of preview performance B.

Returning to FIG. 40-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the preview performance start wait timer (step 241SGS306), and the process is ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-21, in the advanced performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of development effect A is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or It is sufficient to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variable display result specification command, and to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 40-21(B) (step 241SGS312 ).

As shown in Figure 40-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, the variable display results are variable display results for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, Probable Variable Jackpot C), Non-probable Variable Jackpot, Super Reach Miss, and Normal Reach Miss, the judgment values are shown in Figure 40-21 (B). It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the normal reach, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution". In other words, when the normal reach is off, the development effect A is not executed because it does not develop into a weak super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, when the development effect A is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the advanced effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the advanced performance A start wait timer (step 241SGS314), and the process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 40-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279), and If it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), execute the development suggestion performance type determination process shown in FIG. 241SGS280), executes the advanced effect B type determination process shown in FIG. The decision production B type determination process shown in A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the decision production in the variable display (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 40-22(A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a development suggestion performance, and determines a performance pattern for the development suggestion performance using the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance shown in FIG. 40-22(B) (step 241SGS322 ).

As shown in FIG. 40-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced suggestion effect, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" are For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different determination value is assigned to each of them so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 40-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate. "PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off, "Pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestion production type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where a period until the start of the performance is set in the development suggestion performance start wait timer (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-23(A), in the advanced performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance B using the advanced performance B type determination table shown in FIG. 40-23(B) (step 241SGS332). .

As shown in Figure 40-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance B, the variable display results are variable display results for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, Probable Variable Jackpot C), Non-probable Variable Jackpot, Super Reach Miss, and Normal Reach Miss, the judgment values are shown in Figure 40-23 (B). It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are assigned to “execution”. . Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach α, 100 determination values are assigned to “non-execution”. In other words, if the super reach α is off, the development effect B is not executed because it will not develop into a strong super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the advanced performance B is executed than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 40-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the advanced effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the development performance B start waiting timer (step 241SGS334), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 40-24(A), in the final performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final performance type shown in FIG. 40-24(B) based on the variable display result specified in step 241SGS301. The performance pattern of the final performance is determined using the table for determining the performance (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined performance type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), a period until the performance starts is set in the performance start wait timer (step 241SGS343), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 40-24(B), in the table for deciding the type of performance, there is a "pattern" that displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the push button 31B and encourages the player to perform a single press operation of the push button 31B. KB-1'', ``Pattern KB-2'', ``Pattern KV-1'', ``Pattern KV-'' which displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the stick controller 31A and encourages the player to pull the stick controller 31A. 2), if the variable display result is a guaranteed variable jackpot (any of variable variable jackpot A, variable variable jackpot B, variable variable jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, or if the super reach is off. Different determination values are assigned so that the number of determination values is shown in FIG. 40-24(B).

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". Assigned. In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KB-1” and 30 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KV-1”. is assigned.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "pattern KV-1" in which the operation target is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest rate, and a non-probability variable jackpot is determined. In this case, "Pattern KB-2" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off, "Pattern KB-1" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined. ” is determined with the highest percentage. In other words, when the stick controller 31A is the operation target, the expectation of a variable jackpot is higher than when the push button 31B is the operation target. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this feature section 241SG, the random number for determining the preview performance, the random number for determining the development performance A, the random number for determining the development suggestion performance, the random number for determining the development performance B, and the random number for determining the final performance are each random numbers in the range of 1 to 100. Any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various production-determining random numbers is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various production-determining random numbers can be changed as appropriate. All you have to do is decide. Further, a performance determining random number counter for generating these various performance determining random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and the performance determining random number counter is updated every timer interrupt by random number updating processing. Further, a common random number may be used as the random numbers for determining these various effects.

In addition, although this feature section 241SG has exemplified a form in which production patterns of various productions are determined in various production type determination processing, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above productions, for example, characters appear. It may also be possible to decide to execute a preview effect such as a character preview effect in which the preview image changes in stages, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes step by step, or a group preview in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area. When determining, since the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the format of the preview performance, different periods depending on the format of the preview performance may be set in the preview performance start wait timer, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 40-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects the performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 241SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 241SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including image data that indicates the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right, into the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal according to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach β will be explained based on FIGS. 40-25 to 40-31. FIGS. 40-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance operation of the super reach β mainly in the normal reach. In FIG. 40-26, (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in weak super reach. In FIG. 40-27, (A) to (F) are diagrams similarly showing an example of the performance operation in a weak super reach. FIGS. 40-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in strong super reach. In FIGS. 40-29, (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. FIGS. 40-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. FIGS. 40-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display. FIG. 40-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light emitting display section and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, examples of various performance operations in the variable display period based on the variation pattern of super reach β will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 40-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 variably displays decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variation pattern of super reach β based on the occurrence of a starting prize. Start. In addition, in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, there are small numbers corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "2"), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "0"), and the decorative pattern. A display area 5SL for displaying symbols (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, regarding the first suspended memory number, the second suspended memory number, small symbols, and an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 Since it is displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the movable body display Z200, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pending memory number, second pending memory number, and small While the visibility of the symbols and error displays is prevented from decreasing, the decorative symbols are displayed further back (lower layer) than the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Therefore, the visibility of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is prevented from being reduced due to overlapping of decorative patterns.

After starting the variable display, as shown in FIG. 40-25(B), when the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, a normal reach effect is started as a variable display effect of decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 40-25(C), the performance control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable object display Z200 to the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. After being displayed in the first specific effect display position (see FIG. 40-25 (D)), as shown in FIG. By displaying the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to PYA-4), a notice effect A indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state is executed. Further, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and the display size is small, and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-4. When the light emitting display color of Z208E is red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size becomes large according to the expectation level.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-25(F), the effect image Z60 is erased, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed. By erasing the pseudo movable body display Z200, the preview performance A is ended. Thereafter, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in a display area 5SR provided at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 in a manner that is slightly larger than the small pattern.

If non-execution of development performance A is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 40-25 (G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is held at the origin position without falling, a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop. In addition, if it has been decided to execute the development effect A, at the start timing of the development effect A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the mounted movable body 32 is executed as the development effect A, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed. Even if it has been decided not to perform (the fall of the player), by displaying the development notification image Z300, it is possible to notify that the performance will develop into a weak super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 40-26(A), after the execution period of the developed effect A ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310, and also starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310. After the movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, it is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position, and the development suggestion effect is started (see FIG. 40-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed so as to partially overlap the character image Z310 on the near side.

Furthermore, when the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position as a development suggestion effect, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed as white light and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit. , prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200. Then, if any of the patterns (PS-2 to PS-4) is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. The effect image Z62 is enlarged in accordance with the repeated tapping operation (the number of detected operations), and the color of the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined period of time elapses. Suggests that B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-26(E), a blackout display is performed in which the background image is darkened while maintaining the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E even after the valid operation period ends. Thereafter, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the luminescent display color of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the operation validity period ends is displayed at the upper position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the character image Z310 is also displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasis (see Figure 40-26 (F)), temporarily erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 40-26 (G)), and then After displaying the large size character image Z310 (see Figure 40-26 (H)), erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 40-26 (I)), and then Character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 40-26(J)).

Note that in FIGS. 40-26(E) to (J), in consideration of the appearance of the effect, it is preferable that the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E continue to display light, but the effect image Z62 is not displayed.

In this way, the character image Z310 of the same color as the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen, and the character image Z310 of small size, medium size, and large size is displayed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-26 (J) in FIG. By overlapping at least a portion of Z200 on the near side and making it possible to see the second pseudo movable object display Z200 through the overlapping area, expectations for the execution of the development performance B are more preferably created. can be stimulated.

Furthermore, since the character image Z310 is displayed preferentially in front of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. While distracting the player's consciousness, it is possible to suitably suggest that the development effect B will be executed by displaying the character image Z310.

Furthermore, although the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that increases its size in stages, at least the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is enlarged in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the start of display. It may be displayed so as to partially overlap on the near side. Furthermore, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-27(A), while displaying the large-sized character image Z310, the performance control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first position. 1. Erase (hide) without moving to a specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out as an erased display to emphasize that it has been erased. Thereafter, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being hidden from display in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the feature section 241SG, as shown in FIG. 40-27(A), the effect control CPU 120 controls the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to perform the first specific effect while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. Although a mode in which the display position is moved from the display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 40-26 (F) When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed as the first specific effect while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may also be erased (hidden) without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not limited to the one where the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 While Z200 is faded out, it may be moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erased (hidden).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40-27(B), at the start timing of the development effect B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if non-execution of the development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination process in step 241SGS281, as shown in FIG. 40-27(C), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is Moves from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position and erases it without displaying it, and displays the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40-27(D), when the execution of advanced effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed. Displayed in a clockwise manner when viewed from the front. Furthermore, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 40-27(D) are different from the development suggestion effect, and do not indicate the degree of jackpot expectation, but are displayed on the image display device 5 as images of a weak reach effect. The light emitting display color corresponds to the color of the effect image Z65 etc. displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-27(E), a reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). As shown in 27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the reach title indicating the type of super reach effect and the reach indicating the jackpot expectation level. The title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has developed. Next, a super reach performance (for example, a performance that displays an image Z52 of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 40-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the super reach display mode has been set, if patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 40-28(C), an operation promotion image Z53 is displayed to encourage the player to press the push button 31B. On the other hand, if patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 40-28(D). An operation promotion image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A.

The timing when a push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, or a push If the variable display result is a jackpot at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 40-29(E), the mounted movable body 32 A movable body performance is executed in which the object is dropped from the origin position to a performance position on the front side of the display area, and an effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in accordance with the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.). Make it emit light.

Note that the effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass shard images displayed in the manner of glass cracking and scattering, and is exemplified in a form similar to the effect image Z71 described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image may have a different form from the effect image Z71. For example, by displaying a display in which only a portion of the glass is cracked and scattered as fragments, leaving the remaining portion, the mounted movable body 32 may be displayed overlappingly with the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in situations where it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened by taking some time.

Further, in the effect image Z55, as well as the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner includes the mounting movable body 32 disposed on the front side of the image display device 5. By displaying a part of the glass fragments in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

After that, after moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. 40-29(F), after displaying the image Z56 indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character. , as shown in FIG. 40-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and the jackpot confirmed notification is performed. Incidentally, even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-30(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first pseudo movable The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30(B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D are displayed as the first effect. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. In addition, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in the same manner as in FIG. 40-29 (E). Then, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emitting display section Z108A is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color).

Here, details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position explained in FIGS. 40-30(A) and (B) are shown in FIG. 40-31. explain.

As shown in FIG. 40-31(A), the production control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in the display area of the image display device 5, including an image Z71A showing a state in which glass is cracked and a plurality of glass fragments are scattered. At the same time, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Note that the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a portion thereof is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-31(B), when displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, -31(A), the amount and moving display speed of the image Z71A showing glass fragments are increased, and the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed on the near side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 40-31(C) and (D), when displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first effect display position, the glass fragments are smaller than in the state shown in FIG. 40-31(B). The amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the image Z71A are further increased, and these images Z71A are displayed on the near side of the first pseudo movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is added to the first initial display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and move only the image Z71A showing the glass fragments in the effect image Z71 from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable object display Z100. By displaying it, not only can a three-dimensional effect be created by the image Z71A in a manner of scattering around it, but also it is possible to make the first pseudo movable object display Z100 look like a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-31(C), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is viewed through any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. The first pseudo movable body display may be displayed in a visible manner or in any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40-31(D). By displaying a part of Z100 in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-31(D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, and then moves the performance movable display parts Z110A to Z110D to the first performance display. At the same time, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at approximately the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-32, after the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moves to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light-emitting display part Z108A during the first period ta1 to ta2 ( For example, during the production period in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first production display position, a flashing display pattern in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed in the first production display position is a flashing display pattern in which the display is emitted for a period of 33ms) and then is not displayed for a second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33ms). While repeating ta1 to ta4 multiple times, the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on for a first corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then a second corresponding period corresponding to the second period (for example, A blinking pattern in which the lights go out for 40 ms) is repeated multiple times over the presentation period ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same period (synchronization), it is possible to more suitably enhance the performance. It should be noted that it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time (for example, 33 ms) in which the light emitting display section Z108A emits light and the time (for example, 30 ms) to light up the mounted movable body LED 208 in the first period ta1 to ta2. Even in such a case, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the discrepancy between the light emission display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208 will increase over time. This can be prevented.

Further, during the performance period ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, the performance can be made more exciting. Note that the driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 40-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative pattern. , after temporary stop display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved upward and displayed as shown in FIG. 40-30 (D). As shown in E), the display is moved to the first effect display position and then erased. Then, the combination of determined decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after performing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 and notifying the jackpot confirmation, by executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the jackpot game state is controlled. It is possible to make the player feel it more suitably.

Returning to FIG. 40-29, during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, a single press operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (a single pull operation from the stick controller 31A) If the variable display result is incorrect at the timing when the detection signal) is detected, or at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, the variable display result is incorrect. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed without performing the movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area, As shown in Figure 40-29 (I), after displaying the image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character, the combination of losing symbols is displayed as shown in Figure 40-29 (J). A stop display is performed to notify the failure confirmation. Further, in synchronization with the stop display of the combination of missed symbols, the small symbols are stopped and displayed as the combination of missed symbols.

Note that, for example, when the push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period, and when the push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period, there will be a difference in the subsequent length, so the operation timing of the push button 31B will be different. The difference in scale caused by 1. The period of fluctuation of the decorative pattern until the pattern is confirmed; 2. Display period of images Z55 to Z58, 3. This may be absorbed by extending or shortening one of the presentation periods of the movable body presentation.

(Example of Super Reach γ production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach γ will be explained based on FIGS. 40-33 to 40-34. FIGS. 40-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIGS. 40-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance operation of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the variation pattern of super reach γ, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of super reach β. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted. Note that the super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the gaming state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 40-33(A), if pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second intermediate effect display position (see FIG. 40-33 (B)), a jackpot is achieved. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in a variable manner in the decorative pattern display area 5L. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40-33(C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable object display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 40-33 (D), if the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second specific effect display position (see Figure 40-33 (E)), a jackpot is achieved. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Furthermore, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40-33(F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable object display Z200 without moving it from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 40-34(A), if the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the first performance display position (see FIG. 40-34 (B)), a jackpot game state is established. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40-34(C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and erases (hides) the display without displaying it. do.

As shown in FIG. 40-34 (D), if the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the second initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second performance display position (see FIG. 40-34 (E)), a jackpot game state is established. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped and displayed in front of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40-34(F), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second effect display position to the second initial display position and erases (hides) the display without displaying it. do.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, pseudo movable object display and movable objects will be explained based on FIGS. 40-35 to 40-40. FIG. 40-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 40-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 40-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 40-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 40-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIGS. 40-40 are explanatory diagrams for comparing the first pseudo-movable object display and the second pseudo-movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 40-35, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a first non-movable body display Z100 that is different in form, weight, drive mechanism, etc. from the mounted movable body 32, as explained in FIG. 40-14(B). Although this is a pseudo movable body display imitating the mounted movable body M100, the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately at the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position Since both the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 are lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 is the origin The direction of movement from the position to the production position is a common downward direction. That is, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position or origin position above the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIG. 40-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the distance from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. It is longer than the moving distance L1 (L2>L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 40-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) from the upper origin position to the lower production position via the intermediate position due to its own weight. While it takes about 300ms, as shown in FIGS. 40-35(A) to (C), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first intermediate display position and then to the first effect display. It takes about 100ms to move and display the position. In other words, the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, in addition to the longer moving display distance. It's also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 is displayed as a movable mounted structure movable in the same direction (for example, downward) as the first non-mounted movable body M100. In the case where the movable display can be performed from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 in the same direction, the movable display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than that of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement faster than the movement from the origin position to the performance position, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first origin position to the first presentation position below the first origin position. At times, the mechanical part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the movable body M106 and its downward movement is restricted, causing it to stop, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a reaction motion (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement. The display is designed to imitate the first non-mounted movable body M100 where the process is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40-36(A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100. When stopping and displaying at the effect display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilevered structure in which only the left side of the production section M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first production position, the mechanism section M100B moves to the moving body M106. Since the mechanism part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the production part M100A and is restricted from moving downward, a reaction motion due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the production part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the production part M100A and a reaction action occurs.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40-36 (B1), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 displays the reaction movement of the mechanism part M100B, and then , as shown in FIG. 40-36 (B2), displays the reaction motion of the production section M100A. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, is displayed in a more realistic manner (for example, the display imitating the mounted movable body 32 is can be moved and displayed in different modes).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the production section 32A are supported by drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and is moved to the production position. At this time, the mechanism portion 32B comes into contact with the upper portions of the left and right movable bodies 206 and their downward movement is restricted, so that a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to vibrations generated when the movement is restricted.

Next, the operation mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the deciding performance will be explained.

As explained in FIGS. 40-28 to 40-30, the performance control CPU 120 performs a movable body performance in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the final performance. After executing and notifying the jackpot confirmation, it is possible to execute a pseudo movable object display in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-37(A), after starting the determined performance at timing ta0, the performance control CPU 120 controls the player to operate the stick controller 31A or push button 31B within the valid operation period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the production position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during a period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) between timings ta1 and ta2, and then performs a reaction motion during a period between timings ta2 and ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the performance position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is performed. Here, the period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is the period from timing ta1 to ta2 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. It is longer than TL1 (for example, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the production position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to the detection of the player's operation, the game is performed by making it fall faster due to its own weight. On the other hand, when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to suppress damage to the mounted movable body 32 due to impact by moving it slowly.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at timing ta6 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification of jackpot confirmation, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (for example, , about 100 ms), and then a reaction movement display is performed during a period from timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, during the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to the first It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 of moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is such that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display It is slower than the speed when moving to the position and displaying it.

In this way, in the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is made faster than the moving display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. By doing the same as the mounted movable body 32, such as increasing the speed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-37(B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the movement amount L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, it is found that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-37(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is larger than the movement amount L11 of the first reaction motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 (for example, four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-38(A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 The moving display distance L2 of M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position is the same, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is: It is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first production position (TL2<TL10). Therefore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is as follows: It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from the first origin position to the first presentation position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than the movement display of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position. It's also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-38(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is the movement amount L11 of the first reaction action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position, and the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves from the first origin position to the first It is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction movement display performed when moving and displaying to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (for example, four times). By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. In addition, by displaying in an exaggerated manner the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the game It is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the audience.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the reaction motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is as follows. Although the first reaction movement and the reaction movement display were compared, it is also possible to compare any reaction movement from the second time onward with the reaction movement display, or the total or average movement amount of multiple reaction movements and the reaction movement. It may also be compared with the displayed total or average movement amount.

In addition, the reaction motion is an example in which the movable body jumps upward due to the reaction when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a predetermined part of the movable body due to the reaction. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-39(A), when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, or when moving the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first production position to the first origin position In this case, since drive sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, the performance control CPU 120 changes the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the timing tb1 when movement is started. The first period up to tb2 is increased, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 is decreased. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until a first period elapses after starting movement, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in a second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are moved and displayed is from timing tb1 when they start moving to timing tb4 when they stop, as shown in FIG. 40-39(B). Since the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are not necessary, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is changed to the first non-mounted movable body M100. This can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the mounting movable body 32.

Next, the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 will be explained using FIGS. 40-40.

As shown in FIGS. 40-40(A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first pseudo A first frame that is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame that is an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. , at least a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is an input image, is required.

As explained in FIG. 40-16, it is the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and the first identification of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is The moving display distance L3 is from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and although the moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect. The time required to move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is approximately 100 ms, while the time required to move and display the display to the display position is approximately 100 ms. Since the difference is 800 ms, the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is better than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. 1 Faster than the moving display to the specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. Although it is possible to display the images in the order of the second frame shown in 40(C), the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be choppy and unnatural.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 40-40(B) is inserted between the first frame and the second frame as an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. The number of frames of the video is increased to increase the frame rate, and the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is performed for each display frame at the first initial display position, By performing this in the order of the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position, a natural and smooth moving display can be performed.

In this way, even when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position at high speed, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 40-40 (A'), Although displaying the images in the order of the second frame shown in FIGS. 40-40(B') may be considered, the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be jerky and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position. A plurality of interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images to increase the number of frames of the video and increase the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the first identification of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 By performing a moving display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position for each display frame, the second The pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving at a speed slower than the first pseudo movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

Also, for example, in the preview performance B, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. When the moving display PBY-4 is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 moves and is displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. 1. When PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is different, so the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display have different ratios of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The player can recognize the pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in speed of the moving display.

In addition, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and PBY-4 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When is executed, patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position are executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is executed, attention can be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position on the image display device 5 and is stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, Although a form in which a reaction movement display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 40-34 (D) to (E), image display When the device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stops and displays it at the second effect display position, a reaction movement display of a predetermined movement amount ( (bounce display) may also be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-33(A) and (B), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position on the image display device 5. When stopping and displaying at the second intermediate effect display position, or as shown in FIGS. When moving and displaying from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position and stopping display at the second specific performance display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount may be performed.

In addition, the reaction action display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position in the preview effect B is better than the reaction movement display that is performed during the preview effect B. It is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the effect A. By doing so, the moving amount of the preview effect B is larger than that of the preview effect A, so that it can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the reaction action display that is performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position after notification of the jackpot of the pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or the decisive performance. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in pattern PBY-4 of preview effect B. . By doing so, the reaction motion display is larger when the display is moved downward than when it is displayed while moving upward, so that the display can be moved in a more realistic manner.

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation position, and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position The direction of movement from to the production position is a common downward direction, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable object 32 per unit time TL2. big.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
Furthermore, it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or to move and display at a plurality of speeds, so it is possible to diversify the effects.

Although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first It may be a comparison between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison between the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may also be a comparison of speed with movement. In other words, if the speed of the moving display of the pseudo movable body display and the movement of the movable body are compared, the types of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

In addition, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 that performs a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from the first origin position to the first performance position, and The control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable object display Z100 up and down between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position on the image display device 5. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and then stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be displayed by moving in the direction A reaction movement display (bounce display) is performed, and the movement amount L12 of the first reaction movement display is performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

Although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the reaction movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body It may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of display Z200 and the reaction movement of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, when comparing the movement amount between the reaction motion display of the pseudo movable body display and the reaction motion of the movable body, the type of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the developed performance A, which is a movable body performance, and the developed performance B, which is a pseudo movable body display performance, are executed.
It should be noted that when the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect B is executed without the development effect A being executed. The phrase "the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the game is executed" includes the case where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is 100% when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed.

In addition, there is a preview effect A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) of the variable display result becoming a jackpot, a development effect B that notifies you that it will develop into a strong super reach effect, and a suggestion that the development effect B will be executed. In the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first specific performance display can be executed. position to a first specific initial display position and then hide it, and in advanced effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the first specific effect display position, from the first specific effect display position. It is hidden without moving to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that is being displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden before execution of development effect B. At this time, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so it is possible to control the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the development suggestion effect, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 gives priority to the display of the character image Z310 over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable body, and moves from the first specific effect display position. Since it is hidden without returning to the first specific initial display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the advanced effect B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding performance that informs whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, and a development performance B that informs that the deciding performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance. When moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in B, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display The display area including the first specific effect display position is moved from the position to the first specific initial display position and is hidden without being displayed, and the mode at the time of display start of the reach title image Z51 that suggests the execution of the advanced effect B is changed to the display area including the first specific effect display position. When moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a fixed performance, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, the corresponding The display is moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and then hidden.
According to this feature, before the final performance is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 gives priority to displaying the suggestive image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure. Since the display is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the decisive performance, while in the decisive performance, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is the same as the movable Since the information is displayed in a moving manner, it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In addition, the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed in the developed effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed in the final effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo movable object display may be moved between the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and a specific image ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized by a specific image to give a favorable impression to the player. Can be attached.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. A pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the preview effect B faster than the moving display from the position to the first specific effect display position. When PBY-4, which is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or The rate at which the jackpot state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 that are moved and displayed at the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different. The player can recognize the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in the speed of the moving display.
In addition, in the preview performance B, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the second initial display position to the second performance display position When the pattern PBY-4 is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, a jackpot is achieved. The ratio of being controlled by the state (jackpot expectation level) is different when the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in preview performance B, and pattern PBY- If the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed is 0%, or when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in advance presentation B, it is controlled to a jackpot state. This includes a case where the percentage of winning is 100% and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when pattern PBY-3 or PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

In addition, by making the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 display images having not only effect display parts Z100A and Z200A but also mechanism display parts Z100B and Z200B, etc., movable objects operated by a drive mechanism can be displayed. While it is possible to realize a movable body display performance similar to the movable body display by expressing the body more realistically, regarding the moving display, it is not only possible to display the body moving in the same manner as the movable body. By enabling a moving display that is difficult to realize due to the complicated mechanism and increased cost, the interest of the performance can be suitably improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, as a movement display that is difficult to realize with a movable body, high-speed movement, deformed display, and returning from the effect display position to the initial display position are erased without display (hidden). However, by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo movable object display and unrealistically displaying the moving display, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In particular, it is possible to hide or display the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position at a desired timing, so for example, a movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance display position can be returned to its original position. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in design of a performance, such as avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden, and making it possible to immediately start the next performance. play.

Furthermore, the movement amount L12 of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is smaller than that of the first non-mounted movable body M100. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 causes the first non-mounted movable body M100 to move and display. It is possible to simulate the same effect as the first non-equipped movable body M100 without installing it, and also exaggerate the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-equipped movable body M100 moves to the first performance position. By displaying the game in this manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, since the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is installed. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, the pseudo movable body display includes effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, and in the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B are larger than the effect display parts Z100A, Z200A. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Furthermore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is larger than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32, which makes the first pseudo movable object display Z100 more realistic. It can be moved and displayed in various ways.

In addition, the moving period of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the production position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display By not including the first period and the second period, the pseudo movable object display can be moved more smoothly than the movable object.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

In addition, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being moved and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the light-emitting display part Z108A to emit light, thereby preventing the eye from seeing the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed in a moving manner. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to move and display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position, and can display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the preview performance A. The downward direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific direction in preview effect B. By being different from the right direction of moving and displaying to the effect display position, one pseudo movable object display can be moved and displayed from multiple display positions, allowing players to create unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with movable objects. can be provided to

Further, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 controls the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a direction different from the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Modification 1)
Next, modification example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIGS. 40-41. In FIGS. 40-41, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, as explained in FIG. 40-25, in the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, An example is shown in which the display is moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position and then erased, and then, as developed performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40-41(D), the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 partially overlap, that is, the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap. When the movable body 32 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 moves the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and displays the second pseudo When the moving display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is executed in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. As it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, it becomes easy to understand that it is a display object rather than a structure, and the interest of the performance decreases.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 40-41(A), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After displaying (see FIG. 40-41 (B)), by moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erasing it without displaying it (see FIG. 40-41 (C)), As shown in -41(D), the mounted movable body 32 that has moved from the origin position to the performance position as the development effect A may be prevented from overlapping with the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIGS. 40-42. In FIGS. 40-42, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first production display position are common. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is in the first position and in the lower direction than the first position. a direction in which the pseudo movable object display Z402 as the second modification moves between the first display position and a second display position above the first display position; , are in a common direction (e.g., vertical direction), the moving display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is better than the movement display from the first position of the mounted movable body 401 to the second display position. It just needs to be faster than moving to the location.

Also, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (upward). and may be in different directions.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not performed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by performing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a common period, as in the present modification example 2, the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402 can be moved. It may also be possible to perform an effect using the movable body display Z402.

To be more specific, as shown in FIGS. 40-42, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure on which the character "A" is displayed, and The mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R in Modification 2 are movable between a first position and a second position below the first position, and are located at first predetermined positions on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modification example 2 can display the character "BODY", and the image display device The display can be moved between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of No. 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and explanations of the drive mechanisms of the movable mounting body 401 and the movable mounting bodies 501L and 501R will be omitted.

For example, when executing a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo movable body display Z402 in the aforementioned preview performances A, B, advanced performances A, B, etc., the performance control CPU 120 first As shown in Figure 40-42 (A), with the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R waiting in the first position, the pseudo movable body display is displayed as shown in Figure 40-42 (B). After Z402 is displayed at the first display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, as shown in FIG. 40-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-42(D), the movable mounting body 401 is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z402 so that it does not overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 moves to the first position. The pseudo-combined state is the closest to the movable object display Z402 and the characters "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-42(F), the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward while maintaining the pseudo-combined state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved upward. By moving the display upward and further moving the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R to a second predetermined position, it is announced that the performance will develop due to the successful pseudo-combination.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position or the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved to the first display position. The image is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided into different first specific display positions (for example, positions on the left and right sides), and then erased in a manner in which the image is framed out to the left and right of the screen or faded out.

On the other hand, if it is decided to notify that the pseudo combination is not successful and the performance will not develop, etc., as shown in FIG. 40-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 moves downward and the pseudo movement By decelerating and stopping the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 while displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, and displaying the pseudo movable body display Z402 with the upper part destroyed, It is reported that the pseudo-combination is not successful and the performance does not develop. In this way, the pseudo movable object display Z402 can easily realize effects that are difficult to realize with a movable object as a structure.

(Modification 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIGS. 40-43. 40-43, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the feature section 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. , the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a display that can reciprocate in one direction such as the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. For example, the production control CPU 120 may be A) As shown in (B), after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIGS. 40-43 (C), the first It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction in which the movement and display are performed from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 40-43 (C), at the first effect display position, only the effect display part Z200A is vertically rotated around the rotation axis pointing in the left-right direction. It is preferable to be able to perform various types of moving display, such as different rotational movement displays, and moving display in a manner that moves in a direction different from one direction (for example, the depth direction). By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

Although the characteristic portion 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. are also included in the present invention.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
In the feature section 241SG, a configuration in which the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of mounted movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 are used as an example. A movable body may be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Moreover, it is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may also be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3. A pseudo movable body display imitating the side movable body may be movably displayed. Further, as the board-side movable body, it may be possible to display a pseudo movable body display that imitates a variable winning device or the like provided in connection with the game.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is illustrated in which a first non-mounted movable body M100 and a second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 but were not installed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but they were not installed. Good too.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, when erasing the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200, a mode is exemplified in which the display is gradually faded out, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image may be displayed to emphasize that the image has been erased, or erasing may be performed using other methods.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first production display position. A common effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered is displayed when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. Although the form in which sound effects are output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is determined by the first pseudo movable body display Z100. An effect image that is longer than the movement display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and that has different modes when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. A different sound effect may be output at the same time as the display. By doing so, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be highlighted using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to two times in the development effect A and the determined effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , the preview performance B and the decision performance can be executed up to two times, and the moving display of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can be performed up to four times: the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B. Although a certain form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the movable body or the movement display of the pseudo movable body display may be executed a number of times other than the above-mentioned number of times.

Furthermore, when the movable object is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is possible to allow the pseudo-movable object display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. preferable. By doing this, instead of increasing the chances of performing the movable object display too much and lowering the jackpot expectation level, by increasing the opportunity to perform the pseudo-movable object display, the performance will be reduced. This can prevent you from losing interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned multiple performances, for example, during symbol promotion in the re-drawing after jackpot confirmation notification, or during jackpot production, the pseudo movable body display may be displayed moving, and the pseudo movable body displayed at that time may be moved. The movable body display may be a pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

In addition, preview performance A is applied as a special suggestion performance that suggests that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state, and development performance B is applied as a notification performance that informs the player of contents that are advantageous to the player, thereby indicating that the notification performance will be executed. A development suggestion performance is applied as a predetermined performance to suggest, a decision performance is applied as a special performance to notify that the control is in an advantageous state, and the special performance is suggested to be executed before the special performance is executed. Although a form in which preview performance B is applied as the specific performance has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and various performances other than those described above can be applied. Moreover, although these various effects can be performed in one variable display period of super reach, they may be effects that can be performed over a plurality of variable display periods.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, content that is advantageous to the player includes pseudo-runs, jackpots, small hits, reach, hold-up runs, chance-up effects, pre-read notice effects, time-savers and misses, and ceiling-time-savers control (described later). , variable display results, controls, and effects may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winnings, assist time (AT) winnings, replay time (RT) winnings, bonus winnings, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when starting the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the game effect lamps 9, etc. provided on the game board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3, etc. By reducing the brightness or turning off the lights, the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous. When erasing, by increasing the brightness or turning on the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3, the game on the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased. can distract people's consciousness.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, while it is possible to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 by the player's operation, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 It is preferable that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting display part Z108A and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is made impossible by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo movable object display from being impaired or from becoming inconspicuous.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, when hiding the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position in the development suggestion production, the display area including the first specific production display position is Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the character image Z310 is displayed with priority as the notification-related image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image is an image related to the notification effect (for example, development effect B). If available, images other than character images (for example, images imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, in the advanced presentation B, a mode is shown in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed as a suggestion image suggesting execution of the final presentation in the manner at the start of display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, images other than the reach title image may be used as the suggestion image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach effect or a decisive effect) as long as it suggests the execution of a specific effect. .

Furthermore, in the feature section 241SG, a form is exemplified in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of pseudo movable object displays may be displayed moving during a common period. In this case, for example, the movable and displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable and displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 overlaps in the overlapping area. and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer on the front side of the other, Since it is possible to make people conscious of the front and rear positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic performance.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, it is taken into consideration that the mechanism display sections Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, the mounted movable body, center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover up the part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts in the display area of the image display device 5, or the mounted movable body The part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts may be made difficult to see by moving the body.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the display result of the variable display has been exemplified as including "time saving error"; The variable display will be displayed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.) from the time when one of the following is established: performing a clearing process to clear the counter and buffer, controlling the game to a jackpot gaming state, and displaying the display result as a time-saving result. ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute ceiling time saving control that controls the time saving state without going through the jackpot game state. Note that the internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (for example, 900 times) is different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (for example, 100 times). may be different.

When the ceiling time saving control as described above is executed and the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specified number of times without the above predetermined condition being satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second It may be possible to perform a moving display of a pseudo movable object display such as the pseudo movable object display Z200. In this way, it may be possible to perform the moving display of the pseudo movable object display in each notification such as notification of a jackpot, notification of a time-saving hit or loss, notification of ceiling time-saving control, etc., and in each notification, the type of pseudo-movable object display and the moving display may be executed. The aspects may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner as a notification of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be a small win or a time saver. In the case of a miss or when the above-mentioned ceiling time saving control is executed, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are moved to notify you of a small hit or a loss of time saving, and to perform the ceiling time saving control. While notifying that the execution condition has been met, if the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot may be notified by moving the mounted movable body 32.

In addition, a common type of pseudo-movable object display is used to notify when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, but the movable display The embodiments may be different. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, a pseudo-movable object display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-movable object display is It may be different.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, a so-called pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game is applied as an example of the pachinko game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be a so-called 1 type 2 type gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of a jackpot game, and the gaming characteristics can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls is The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the value is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 32 Mounting movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU for
200 Dispensing device 202 First guide passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 First passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover bodies 271A to 271H Holes 314, 324, 334 Cover part 340 Ball stopper members N1 to 6, 11 to 16 screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can play games,
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw fall restriction portion provided above the guide passage forming portion;
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
There is an uncovered area not covered by the screw fall restriction part on the upper surface of the guide passage forming part,
The guide passage forming part is provided with a plurality of specific restriction parts for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming part to the dispensing part,
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction portions are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered areas in the guide path forming portion,
The screw fall restriction part is
The game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion does not stay there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion can stay on the screw fall restriction portion without falling into the guide path forming portion. configured,
including a first retention part and a second retention part capable of retaining the screw member on the screw fall restriction part,
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by: